LSR AIMEX

Fuji Flexible Placement Platform
AIMEX
System Reference
Original Instructions
SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
CAUTION !
Contact Fuji or a Fuji representative before
transporting this product to a foreign location within
your company or selling it to a third party within
your country or a different country.
If this product is sold or transported to a different
country without contacting Fuji, it may not be
possible for us to supply spare parts or provide
maintenance.
Fuji Flexible Placement Platform
AIMEX
System Reference
SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
FUJI MACHINE MFG. CO., LTD.

Copyrights
All rights regarding this manual are reserved by Fuji Machine Manufacturing Co., Ltd. This manual may
not, in whole or in part, be reproduced by any means (electronic, mechanical or otherwise), or reused in
any way, without the prior written permission of Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Warranty and Liability

Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. accepts no responsibility for situations that may arise due to any of the follow-
ing:
• The use of third party parts.
• The use of non-genuine Fuji parts.
• Incorrect settings made by the customer.
• Improper use of Fuji equipment.
Notice
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. reserves the right to change the content of this manual without notice.
Every effort has been made to ensure that this manual is correct in every detail. However, please contact
Fuji in the unlikely event that errors or omissions are detected.
Fuji Machine Mfg. Co., Ltd. accepts no liability whatsoever for damages that may arise as a result of this
manual, with the exception of problems that originate in our products.
SYS-AIMEX-9.0E Contents
Contents
Introduction ................................................................ xiii
1. Safety Guidelines ................................................. 1
1.1 About Symbols ................................................. 1
1.1.1 Degree of hazards ..................................................1
1.1.2 Examples of the symbols ........................................1
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types ................. 2
1.3 Safety Rules for AIMEX ................................... 6
1.3.1 Main unit .................................................................6
1.3.2 Tray unit-LT ............................................................9
1.3.3 Tray unit-M ............................................................10
1.3.4 Disposal of linear motor magnets .........................10
1.4 Safety Labels ................................................. 11
1.4.1 AIMEX safety label explanations ..........................12
1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button ................... 13
1.6 Locking System .............................................. 14
1.6.1 Lockout procedure ................................................14
1.6.2 Unlocking procedure .............................................16
2. Machine Components and Functions ................ 17
2.1 Machine Components .................................... 17
2.1.1 Machine external components ..............................17
2.1.2 Machine internal components ...............................17
2.2 Operation Panel ............................................. 18
2.2.1 Operation panel buttons .......................................18
2.2.2 Operation screen ..................................................19
2.3 Signal Lamps ................................................. 22
2.4 Feeder Pallet Buttons and LEDs .................... 23
2.5 PCU (Pallet Change Unit) .............................. 24
3. Basic Operation ................................................. 25
3.1 Turning ON/OFF the AIMEX .......................... 25
3.1.1 Turning on the AIMEX ..........................................25
3.1.2 Waking modules ...................................................26
AIMEX System Reference i

Contents SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode ...................... 27

3.1.4 Turning off the AIMEX .......................................... 27
3.2 Enabling Operation at Each Side of the
Machine ........................................................... 28
3.2.1 How to enable operation ...................................... 28
3.2.2 How to lock operation ........................................... 29
3.3 Displaying the Manual Mode Screen ............. 30
3.4 Displaying the Changeover Guidance Screen 30
3.5 Displaying the Image Monitor Screen ............ 31
3.5.1 Changing screens at a single robot machine ....... 31
3.5.2 Changing screens at a twin robot machine .......... 32
3.6 Opening the Door for a Module Side ............. 33
3.7 Stopping the Buzzer ....................................... 34
3.8 Setting Feeders on Feeder Pallets ................ 35
3.9 Removing Feeders from the Feeder Pallet .... 38
4. Preparing Production .......................................... 39
4.1 Transmitting Jobs ........................................... 40
4.2 Displaying Exchange Guidance for Each Unit 41
4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting the job ...... 41
4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration .................... 42
4.2.3 Changeover menu exchange guidance ............... 43
4.3 Changing the Job ........................................... 45
4.3.1 Job changeover guidance .................................... 45
4.3.2 Job changeover procedures ................................. 45
4.4 Feeder Batch Exchange ................................ 47
4.4.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance screen ............ 47
4.4.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange ............... 47
4.5 Replacing Feeders ......................................... 52
4.5.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen .................. 52
4.5.2 Removing and attaching feeders ......................... 53
4.5.3 Operation when using the free allocation function 55
4.6 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LT ..................... 57
4.6.1 Tray setting guidance screens ............................. 57
ii AIMEX System Reference

4.6.2 Setting trays ..........................................................59

4.6.3 Changing magazines ............................................63
4.6.4 Setting the pickup position ....................................68
4.6.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray
unit-LT ....................................................................70
4.6.6 Cautions when using parts with height 25.4 mm
or more ...................................................................70
4.7 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-M ...................... 72
4.7.1 Tray setting guidance screen ................................72
4.7.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier) ...........74
4.7.3 Setting the pickup position ....................................77
4.7.4 Cautions when inserting trays into the Tray
unit-M .....................................................................79
4.8 Replacing Backup Plates ............................... 80
4.8.1 Important point when replacing backup plates .....80
4.8.2 Backup plates replacement guidance screen .......81
4.8.3 Removing and attaching backup plates ................81
4.8.4 Areas in which backup pins can be placed ...........83
4.8.5 Cautions when allocating backup pins ..................83
4.8.6 Cautions when using the optional soft backup
pins .........................................................................84
4.9 Replacing Nozzles ......................................... 86
4.9.1 Nozzle replacement guidance screen ...................86
4.9.2 Removing and attaching nozzles ..........................87
4.9.3 Nozzle list .............................................................90
4.9.4 Nozzle station list ..................................................92
4.10 Replacing the Placing Head ......................... 93
4.10.1 Cautions when exchanging heads ......................93
4.10.2 Head replacement guidance screen ...................94
4.10.3 Removing and attaching the placing head ..........94
4.10.4 Setting nozzle jigs ...............................................98
4.10.5 Before setting an H02F head ............................100
4.11 Other Changeover ...................................... 102
4.11.1 Device type changeover ...................................102
4.11.2 Parts camera type changeover .........................103
AIMEX System Reference iii

4.11.3 Changing between V-Advance and standard

module guidance ................................................. 103
5. Production ........................................................ 105
5.1 Starting Production ...................................... 105
5.2 Stopping Operation ...................................... 106
5.2.1 Cycle stop .......................................................... 106
5.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels
(Stop after production of one board) .................... 106
5.2.3 Emergency stop ................................................. 107
5.3 Restarting Production .................................. 108
5.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing
and unloading current panels .............................. 108
5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop ................... 108
5.4 Supplying Feeder Parts ............................... 109
5.4.1 Splicing parts ...................................................... 109
5.4.2 Replacing feeders .............................................. 115
5.4.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT) ....................... 118
5.4.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders ........................ 119
5.4.5 Exchanging feeders when using the free
allocation function ................................................ 121
5.5 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LT ......... 122
5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure
(when using Fujitrax Verifier) .............................. 122
(when not using Fujitrax Verifier) ........................ 127
(when supplying parts to supply magazine) ....... 132
(for dynamic alternate tray resupply) .................. 136
5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function ...... 142
5.6 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-M .......... 143
(when using Fujitrax Verifier) .............................. 143
(when not using Fujitrax Verifier) ........................ 148
5.6.3 When parts run out for both position A
and position B ...................................................... 152
5.6.4 Using the SUPPLY button .................................. 153
iv AIMEX System Reference

5.7 Clearing Errors ............................................. 154

6. Machine Operations ......................................... 155
6.1 Blocking Feeders ......................................... 155
6.1.1 Feeder exchange guidance displayed ................155
6.1.2 Replacing feeders ...............................................155
6.2 Automatic Backup Pin Function ................... 156
6.2.1 Using automatic backup pins ..............................156
6.2.2 Errors during operation .......................................157
6.2.3 Important points ..................................................163
6.3 Panel Position Correction Function .............. 164
6.3.1 Attaching felt paper plate ....................................164
6.3.2 Regarding errors when using the panel position
correction function ................................................164
6.4 Device Statistical Warnings and Error Stop is
Supported ....................................................... 168
6.4.1 Device statistical warning screen ........................168
6.4.2 The statistical error display .................................169
6.5 Changing Nozzles Due to Statistical
Warnings ........................................................ 170
6.5.1 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings .....170
6.5.2 Exchanging nozzles ............................................170
6.5.3 Errors during operation .......................................171
6.6 Nozzle Changeover Error Detection
Function .......................................................... 172
6.6.1 Clearing nozzle changeover errors .....................172
6.6.2 Clearing errors when using H01
and H02(F) heads ................................................172
6.6.3 Clearing errors when using H04, H08M(Q),
H12HS(Q) and V12 heads ...................................173
6.6.4 Clearing nozzle changeover errors in Accessory
Software ...............................................................173
6.7 Temporarily Saving Trace Data
on the Machine ............................................... 174
6.8 Automatic Nozzle Cleaning Function ........... 175
AIMEX System Reference v

6.8.1 Using the automatic nozzle cleaning function .... 175

6.8.2 Important points ................................................. 176
6.9 Automatic Changeover Function .................. 177
6.9.1 Barcode ID mode ............................................... 178
6.9.2 Handy scanner mode ......................................... 178
6.9.3 Automatic changeover usage precautions ......... 179
6.10 Vision Data Correction Function for Vision
Processing Errors ........................................... 181
6.10.1 Operation overview .......................................... 181
6.10.2 Vision data correction guidance and procedure 181
6.11 Hybrid Calibration Support ......................... 182
6.11.1 Handling the jig parts ....................................... 182
6.11.2 Starting measurement ...................................... 183
6.11.3 Regarding errors when measuring ................... 184
6.11.4 Dedicated jig cleaning method ......................... 186
6.11.5 Clearing an error when measuring from
Accessory Software ............................................. 186
6.12 Conveyor Only Function When a Module
is Non-functional ............................................. 187
6.12.1 Preparation procedures .................................... 187
6.12.2 Conveyor only (breakdown) operation ............. 188
6.13 Robot Collision Warning Function .............. 189
6.13.1 Warning screen and how to resolve the
problem ................................................................ 189
6.13.2 Important points ............................................... 190
6.14 IPS Dust Detection Function ...................... 191
6.14.1 Error screen and how to clear error ................. 191
6.15 Network Error Detection Function .............. 192
6.15.1 Duplicate IP address detection function ........... 192
6.15.2 Line Monitor disconnection .............................. 192
6.15.3 Multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler
server ................................................................... 193
6.15.4 Repeated connections and disconnections
with host .............................................................. 194
6.15.5 Clearing errors from Accessory Software ........ 194
vi AIMEX System Reference

6.16 Reducing Auto Calibration Time When

Exchanging Heads ......................................... 195
6.16.1 Operating while reducing calibration time when
exchanging heads ................................................195
6.16.2 Important points ................................................195
6.16.3 Clearing auto calibration results .......................195
6.16.4 Errors during operation .....................................196
6.17 Waste Tape Box Cleaning Guidance ......... 199
6.17.1 Waste tape box cleaning guidance ...................199
6.17.2 Cleaning the waste tape box ............................199
6.18 Panel height detection function .................. 200
6.18.1 Procedures for specifying the panel height
function .................................................................200
6.18.2 Operating using the panel height detection
function ................................................................200
6.18.3 Errors during operation .....................................200
6.18.4 Outputting panel height measurement results
to a file .................................................................201
6.19 Operation when IPS is broken ................... 205
6.19.1 Operation using operation when IPS is broken 205
6.19.2 Clearing the mode for when IPS is broken .......205
6.19.3 Clearing auto calibration results .......................206
7. Using Manual Commands ............................... 207
7.1 Items Selectable from the Menu Screen ...... 207
7.2 Cleaning Command ..................................... 208
7.3 Head Positioning Command ........................ 210
7.4 Job Test Command ...................................... 212
7.4.1 Pickup position check (device offset) ..................212
7.4.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels ...........217
7.5 Diagnosis Command .................................... 218
7.6 Panel Removal Command ........................... 219
7.7 Exchange Command .................................... 222
7.7.1 Exchanging devices ............................................223
7.7.2 Ejecting nozzles ..................................................225
7.7.3 Exchanging heads ..............................................227
AIMEX System Reference vii

7.7.4 Maximizing the conveyor width .......................... 230

7.7.5 Exchanging backup plates ................................. 232
7.8 Head Adjustment Command ........................ 235
7.8.1 CleanDing the nozzles on the head ................... 236
7.8.2 Cleaning all of the nozzles ................................. 237
7.8.3 Removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part ..... 237
7.9 Information Command ................................. 241
8. Accessory Software .......................................... 243
8.1 Functions ..................................................... 243
8.2 Starting Accessory Software ........................ 243
8.3 Floor Monitor ................................................ 244
8.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings ............. 244
8.4 Vision Processing Error Analysis ................. 246
8.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing
error analysis screen ........................................... 246
8.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring
settings ................................................................ 247
8.5 Warnings ...................................................... 249
8.5.1 Displaying warnings ........................................... 249
8.5.2 Warning information ........................................... 249
8.5.3 Displaying current warnings ............................... 250
8.5.4 Displaying warning details .................................. 250
8.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list .......................... 251
8.5.6 Setting the success rate ..................................... 251
8.6 Messages ..................................................... 252
8.6.1 Displaying messages ......................................... 252
8.6.2 Adding messages ............................................... 253
8.6.3 Editing messages ............................................... 253
8.7 Error Search ................................................. 254
8.8 Service List .................................................. 255
8.8.1 Displaying the services ...................................... 255
8.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer
service installer .................................................... 256
viii AIMEX System Reference

8.9 Acquiring Machine Trace Data

Automatically .................................................. 257
8.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data screen ................257
8.9.2 Auto trace data screen items and their
meanings ..............................................................257
8.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition ........258
8.9.4 The machine during automatic trace acquisition 258
8.9.5 Downloading trace data ......................................259
9. Settings and Management ............................... 261
9.1 Starting Machine Accessories ...................... 261
9.2 Making machine configuration settings ........ 262
9.2.1 Specifying nozzle cleaning settings ....................263
9.2.2 Specifying IPS dust detection settings ................264
9.2.3 Tray unit pickup order .........................................264
9.2.4 Specifying automatic changeover settings
(barcode ID mode) ...............................................267
9.2.5 Specifying automatic changeover settings
(handy scanner mode) ........................................269
9.2.6 Specifying panel position correction function
settings .................................................................270
9.2.7 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LT .271
9.2.8 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings ...............273
9.2.9 Specifying settings for reducing auto calibration
time when exchanging heads ..............................276
9.2.10 Function to prevent nozzle collisions
from using the feeder buttons ..............................276
9.2.11 Supply guidance priority settings ......................277
9.3 Module configuration settings ...................... 278
9.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings ...........................279
9.3.2 Breakdown operation settings ............................279
9.3.3 Auto backup pin settings .....................................280
9.3.4 Hybrid calibration support ...................................280
9.3.5 Specifying the panel quantity to display waste
tape cleaning guidance .......................................281
9.3.6 Settings for using operation when IPS is broken 281
9.4 Data Acquisition ........................................... 282
9.4.1 Acquiring trace data ............................................282
AIMEX System Reference ix

9.4.2 Acquiring images ................................................ 282

9.5 Calibration .................................................... 283
9.5.1 On-machine PAM ............................................... 283
9.5.2 Module camera calibration ................................. 283
9.6 Remote operation ........................................ 286
9.6.1 Updating software on the AIMEX ....................... 286
9.6.2 Upgrading machine control software .................. 286
9.6.3 Specifying a production mode ............................ 286
9.6.4 Conveyor calibration .......................................... 287
9.6.5 Completing nozzle maintenance ........................ 288
9.6.6 Forcibly clearing errors ....................................... 288
9.6.7 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment ................ 289
10. Using Software Tools ..................................... 291
10.1 Image Viewer ............................................. 293
10.1.1 Installing Image Viewer .................................... 293
10.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer ............... 293
10.2 NetworkSetting ........................................... 294
10.2.1 Changing network settings ............................... 294
10.3 VersionUp .................................................. 295
10.4 EmergencyInstaller .................................... 296
10.4.1 Preparation procedures .................................... 296
10.4.2 Recovering the base CPU ................................ 297
10.4.3 Recovering the module CPU ............................ 298
10.4.4 After recovering module CPUs ......................... 300
10.5 MotionToolMini ........................................... 301
10.5.1 Installing MotionToolMini .................................. 301
10.5.2 Starting MotionToolMini ................................... 301
10.5.3 Displaying servo positions ................................ 301
10.5.4 Receiving a dump file via MotionToolMini ........ 302
10.5.5 Receiving a trace file via MotionToolMini ......... 302
10.5.6 Displaying servo details via MotionToolMini .... 302
10.5.7 Displaying errors via MotionToolMini ............... 302
10.5.8 Using the MTReset function ............................. 302
x AIMEX System Reference

10.6 TcpIpSetting ............................................... 303

10.6.1 Preparation procedures ....................................303
10.6.2 Procedure .........................................................304
10.7 Equipment Check ....................................... 305
10.7.1 Installing Equipment Check ..............................305
10.7.2 Checking modules on a production line ............305
10.7.3 Checking modules not on a production line ......306
10.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors ...306
10.7.5 Checking the operation of units ........................308
10.7.6 Checking the tray unit-LT calibration values .....308
10.7.7 Tray unit-LT command list ................................309
10.7.8 Conveyor command list ....................................311
10.7.9 Single action positioning operations .................312
10.7.10 Checking unit configuration ............................313
10.8 MEdit .......................................................... 317
10.9 IPS Viewer ................................................. 318
10.9.1 Installing IPS Viewer .........................................318
10.9.2 IPS Viewer Window Elements ..........................319
10.9.3 Basic IPS Viewer Operation .............................319
10.9.4 Reading the Displayed Results .........................322
11. Upgrading Software ....................................... 331
11.1 Upgrading Machine Control Software ........ 331
11.1.1 Using Accessory Software ................................331
11.1.2 Using VersionUp from the AIMEX Tools ...........334
11.2 Upgrading Unit Software ............................ 337
12. Troubleshooting ............................................. 341
12.1 Troubleshooting Points .............................. 341
12.2 Checking Error Codes ................................ 341
12.3 Troubleshooting Common Issues .............. 342
12.3.1 Mark vision processing errors ...........................342
12.3.2 Part vision processing errors ............................343
12.3.3 Pickup errors .....................................................344
12.3.4 Poor placing accuracy ......................................346
AIMEX System Reference xi

12.3.5 Panel conveyance errors ................................. 348

12.3.6 If there are missing parts .................................. 349
12.3.7 Panel detection error between modules ........... 350
12.3.8 An encoder backup error occurs ...................... 350
12.3.9 If there is computer system trouble .................. 351
12.4 Troubleshooting Common Fuji Flexa
and Fujitrax Related Issues ............................ 356
12.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors ................................... 356
12.4.2 Fujitrax related errors ....................................... 356
12.5 Major Machine Issues ................................ 357
12.6 Acquiring Trace Data ................................. 358
12.6.1 Acquiring trace data using Accessory Software 358
12.6.2 Automatic trace data generation after an OS
error ..................................................................... 358
12.6.3 Forced generation of trace data when turning
on the machine .................................................... 359
12.6.4 Temporarily saving trace data on the machine 359
xii AIMEX System Reference

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
Introduction
Provided Manuals
The manuals listed below are shipped with the machine. In order to operate this machine
in the safest and most efficient manner, please read the provided manuals thoroughly and
observe all instructions and warnings.
• AIMEX Setup Manual
• AIMEX System Reference
• AIMEX Mechanical Reference
• AIMEX series Programming Manual
AIMEX Setup Manual

This manual is used for setting up new machines or for moving machines in your factory.
This manual provides instructions from setting up the machine and units to making software
settings.
AIMEX System Reference

This manual provides instructions and settings for using the machine in the most efficient
manner for production and changeover. This manual mostly covers software and systems
items.
AIMEX Mechanical Reference

This manual provides instructions for mechanical aspects of the machine such as adjusting
sensors, preventive maintenance and replacing parts. Refer to this manual when
performing maintenance on the machine such as cleaning, lubrication and adjustments.
AIMEX series Programming Manual

This manual provides the instructions for programming the machine that are unique for the
AIM. Refer to this manual when creating jobs or part data in Fuji Flexa, transmitting jobs,
or editing jobs on the machine.
AIMEX System Reference xiii

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
MEMO:
xiv AIMEX System Reference

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 1. Safety Guidelines
1. Safety Guidelines
Fuji machines are designed and produced with safety as one of our main considerations.
However, even a perfectly designed machine can be damaged, or someone can still be
injured, if the user does not follow the safety rules. It is the responsibility of the user to make
sure that all safety rules are followed at all times.
Be sure to read the safety rules before operating the machine and always use the machine
in accordance with these safety rules.
1.1 About Symbols

This section provides an explanation of the relevant safety precautions to be adhered to by
all people who use or work on this machine. An explanation of the warning labels attached
to the machine is also provided.
This manual employs the use of descriptive symbols and provides details of the level of
danger involved in certain operations to accompany the explanations of machine warning
labels and safety related items. Be sure you understand the meanings of these symbols
before reading the manual.
1.1.1 Degree of hazards
Symbol Definition
Failure to observe this hazard warning will lead to severe
DANGER injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

WARNING injury or death.
Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

CAUTION personal injury or damage to the machine.
1.1.2 Examples of the symbols
Symbol Explanation
Hazard
A triangle is used to draw your attention to a hazard. The symbol
inside the triangle indicates the nature of the hazard (in this case,
electrical shock).
Prohibition
A circle with a diagonal line is used to draw your attention to an
operation that is prohibited. The symbol inside the circle indicates
the nature of the operation (in this case, “Do not touch”).
A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to a

mandatory action. In other words, you are required to carefully
perform the given instructions.
AIMEX System Reference 1

1. Safety Guidelines SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types
DANGER
Do not go near movable parts during automatic or manual
operation.
• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting

in serious injury or death.
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the conveyor
inlets.
• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

• If using a single machine independently, install safety covers or
interlock sensors at the conveyor openings, in accordance with
your local safety regulations, to prevent injuries.
Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

open.
• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting in personal
injury.
• When maintenance work is completed, return the safety covers
and doors to their original (closed) position.
Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons before operating the machine.
• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

buttons so that they can be pushed quickly in case of an
emergency.
Check the safety functions before starting operation.
• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the

EMERGENCY STOP buttons, the safety switches on the
covers and doors, and all other machine safety features.
• Contact a Fuji serviceman immediately if any of the safety
functions fail and do not use the machine.
Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.
• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches or disable

any safety functions. Persons working on the machine may be
seriously injured if operation commands are issued by mistake.
2 AIMEX System Reference

WARNING
Ensure that there is nobody inside the machine when
working on the machine with two people or more.
• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating

the machine. Operating the machine may result in injury to
people who are in or near the machine.
Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.
• There are times during automatic operation when the machine

may appear to have stopped, such as while it is waiting for a
panel, waiting for the next machine, reading marks, or
transmitting data. In such cases, once certain conditions are
fulfilled, the machine will begin moving again automatically, so
care should be taken. Only go near the machine after the
EMERGENCY STOP button has been pushed.
• When the “production screen” is displayed on the operation
panel, the machine will begin to move once certain conditions
are satisfied. Be aware that the machine will begin to move
regardless of whether these conditions are satisfied
intentionally or inadvertently.
Do not place hands near the main conveyor.
• Hands or other body parts may get caught in the machine.
Always turn off power to the machine before performing

maintenance.
• Failure to observe this is extremely dangerous and may result

in sudden machine movements or electric shock.
Do not insert or remove connectors while power is being

supplied to the machine.
• Removing or inserting connectors while power is being supplied

to the machine may not only cause damage to the machine, but
may also cause electric shock.
Stay clear from the machine when it is being lifted.
• Never put hands or feet under the machine when the machine
is being raised by means of a jack or other device for leveling or
transport.
Do not wear gloves made of cloth when operating the

machine.
• Rubber gloves will tear when caught by the machine and

prevent hands from being drawn into the machine. Gloves
made of cotton or similarly strong material may cause hands to
be drawn into the machine.

WARNING
Long hair should be tied back.
• Long hair may get caught in machines that are operating.

Hair should be kept short or tied back so that it does not get
caught in the machine.
Turn off the air supply when removing items such as

cylinders, valves, or filters.
• Removing cylinders, valves, or filters without turning the air

supply off may cause parts or particles to be propelled into the
eyes.
• Be sure to turn off the air supply when removing cylinders,
valves, or filters.
Wear protective glasses when removing parts from the

machine.
• Be sure to wear protective glasses when removing or

exchanging parts.
Check the machine operation panel and the target axes while
manually operating the machine.
• When operating the machine, carefully follow the instructions

that are displayed on the operation panel.
• Operating the machine without looking at the operation panel
may lead to operating errors or result in damage to the machine
or products.
Do not touch the servo amp power terminal for at least five
minutes after turning off the power.
• The servo amp retains a high voltage even after the power has
been turned off.
• Always wait at least five minutes, and ensure that the CHARGE
lamp is off, before performing any work that may result in
contact with the servo amp terminal.
CAUTION
Do not operate the machine with sensors removed or
disabled.
• Removing or disabling sensors will disarm the interlock,

resulting in collisions and damage to the machine.

CAUTION
Confirm the operational status from the messages on the
operation panel for machines that support automatic
changeover.
• On machines equipped with an automatic changeover system,

it is difficult to determine the changeover status from the front of
the machine during production. Follow the instructions on the
operation panel.
Use the handle when opening or closing the safety doors,

fences, or covers.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers without

using the handle may result in injury.
• Opening or closing the safety doors, fences, or covers with too
much force may result in damage to the machine.
Always wear an antistatic wrist strap when working with

circuit boards.
• Failure to do so may result in board damage.

• Ensure that the wrist strap is connected to the earth bonding
point.

1.3 Safety Rules for AIMEX

1.3.1 Main unit
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the machine in the
spaces between feeders, especially when there are only a few
feeders present on the feeder pallet.
• Failure to do so could result in injury due to contact with the head.
Do not look directly into the vision processing light or the panel
conveyance check sensor light. Wear tinted protective glasses.
• Eye damage may be caused by looking directly into the light.
Do not insert hands or other body parts into the duct of the
waste tape processing unit.
• There is a very sharp cutter blade inside the unit. Exercise extreme
caution, especially when carrying the unit.
Use two or more people to carry the waste tape processing unit.
• Maintenance of the waste tape processing unit is usually

accompanied by removing the unit from the machine. Use two or
more people to carry the unit because it is very heavy.
Ensure that the work bench where the waste tape processing
unit is placed is flat.
• The unit may fall to the ground if the work bench is tilted, resulting
in personal injury and/or machine damage.
When lifting a backup plate, be careful not to put your hands in

the areas between the plate, width-changing ball screw, and
hexagonal shaft. Also, be careful not to cut your hands on the
corners of the conveyor rails.
• Failure to do so could result in injury.
Do not lift a backup plate if you are not strong enough, and
maintain correct lifting posture if you do lift a backup plate.
• Because the backup plates are very heavy, lifting them incorrectly
could result in back or other injuries.
Do not touch linear motors immediately after production is

stopped.
• Contact with the shaft or coil section could cause burns. The shaft
and coil section of linear motors remain very hot even after
production is stopped.

WARNING
People with a heart pacemaker should stay clear of the Y-axis
linear motor in modules (do not come within 400 mm).
• A strong magnetic field is generated by the Y-axis linear motor in

modules. Exercise extreme caution, because pacemakers may
malfunction due to the magnetic field.
CAUTION
Be careful to not pinch your hands when opening and closing
the safty doors.
Do not push or pull on the mark camera unit when moving the
placing head.
• The position of the mark camera may be shifted, which negatively

affects the placing accuracy of the machine.
Do not put your hands underneath the nozzle station when

loading it in the machine.
Place the waste tape processing unit upside down on the work
bench.
• The duct may deform under the weight of the unit if it is not placed
upside down.
Open the top doors completely (move all the way up).
• Injury may occur to any body parts in the machine if the top door is
not completely opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility
that it might slide back down and injure any body parts in the way.
• Injury may result to body parts between the tray unit-LT and the
safety door when the tray unit-LT is attached and the safety door is
closed or falls.
Maintain a good posture when moving the X- and Y-axes by

hand.
Connect a 200 to 230 V AC +/-10%, 50/60 Hz power supply to the

machine primary power supply side.
• The machine may not function properly or be damaged if a power

supply other than that above is used.

CAUTION
When working close to a linear motor (within 55 mm) do not use
ordinary metal tools. Use only non-magentic tools.
• The magnetic force can pull metal objects and result in injury (by
trapping fingers or other body parts).
Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches, and other precision

machines away from linear motors (do not bring within 55 mm).
• Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field generated by

a linear motor.

1.3.2 Tray unit-LT
WARNING
When pushing a tray unit-LT into the machine, ensure that no
one is between the tray unit-LT and machine base.
• A person could be seriously injured or crushed to death if caught

between the tray unit-LT and machine.
Lock the caster brake whenever the tray unit-LT is removed

from the machine.
• Depending on the slope and condition of the floor, the tray unit-LT
could roll unexpectedly, possibly resulting in injury.
Securely grip the magazine rack when lifting, carrying, or

positioning it.
• The magazine rack is heavy and injury could result if dropped.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch body parts when opening or closing the
tray unit-LT doors or covers. Do not leave the doors or covers
open while the tray unit-LT is unattended.
• Body parts may get pinched or caught, resulting in injury.
When using the handle that adjusts the height of the tray unit-
LT, make sure that body parts are not caught between the
handle and cover.
When removing or replacing the empty tray box, be careful not

to pinch body parts between the tray unit-LT and empty tray
box.
Do not insert body parts through the bottom of the tray unit-LT
into the inner section where mechanical parts are located.

1.3.3 Tray unit-M
WARNING
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the space between
the tray unit-M and the feeder pallet when attaching or removing
the tray unit-M.
Use two or more people to lift, carry, or position the tray unit-M.
• The tray unit-M is extremely heavy and injury could result if

dropped.
Do not insert hands or other body parts in the side spaces

between the machine and the tray unit-M during automatic
operation.
CAUTION
Be careful not to pinch body parts in the tray unit-M door when
opening and closing it. Do not leave the door open while the
tray unit-M is unattended.
• Body parts may be pinched or caught, resulting in injury.
1.3.4 Disposal of linear motor magnets

Extremely powerful magnets are used on the stator of the linear motor. It is extremely
important to follow the caution points below when disposing of the linear motor. If disposal
is done by a third party, be sure to instruct them that demagnetization is necessary before
disposal.
• Before removing the stator, be sure to turn off the machine.
• Before removing the stator, prepare a space with no magnetic materials in which
to put it.
• After removing the stator, cover it with non-magnetic material such as paper or
wood to a thickness of at least 20 mm.
• Do not disassemble the stator under any circumstances.
• Heat the stator to at least 330 degrees Celsius for at least 1 hour
(demagnetization processing). Upon cooling, the stator can be disposed of
along with normal industrial waste.

1.4 Safety Labels

To warn the operator of hazards, safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions
indicated in the figure below.
AIMEX
*1 Side 1
*2
*1
*1
Side 2
*1 30MEC-0001

Tray unit-LT PCU
*1
Tray unit-M Head Cleaner
*1
30MEC-0002Ea
1.4.1 AIMEX safety label explanations
Symbol Explanation
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection
Direct exposure to the lighting unit may result in damage to the
eyes. Ensure to use light protection eyewear when necessary.
Caution, Warning: Shock danger

*1: High voltage! Contact may cause electric shock. Turn off
the power prior to servicing.
*2: Connect a 200 - 230V AC +/-10% 50/60Hz primary power
supply to the machine.
Caution, Warning: Cutting danger
An automatic tape cutter is positioned behind this frame.
Exercise extreme caution when performing maintenance.
Caution, Warning: Moving parts

Do not insert hands or other body parts.
Moving parts may cause injury. Turn off the power before
inserting any body parts.
Warning: High Temperature
Contacting with the main body and shaft of the linear motor
could result in burns. They are high temperature.
Mandatory action, Direction: Eye protection

Wear eye protection such as protective glasses while
performing this procedure. There is a danger of foreign
objects such as dust getting in your eyes.

1.5 The EMERGENCY STOP Button

In the event of an emergency, press any of the red EMERGENCY STOP buttons located
on the machine at the positions indicated in the figure below.
Side 2
Side 1 EMERGENCY STOP button
EMERGENCY STOP button
Tray unit-LT
EMERGENCY STOP button
30MEC-0003Ea

1.6 Locking System

When performing maintenance or service on the machine, all personnel who service the
machine should use locks to prevent others from turning on the machine power or air. This
procedure is referred to as a lockout.
To prevent accidents, especially those caused by mistakes when multiple operators are
present, all related personnel should have thorough knowledge of lockout procedures.
1.6.1 Lockout procedure

Prepare 2 commercially available padlocks, and require all service personnel to carry
lockout nametags.
1. Switch off the machine power.
2. Rotate the main switch on the base to the OFF position.
NXTSAF004
3. Lock the main switch with a padlock.

All personnel working on the machine should attach their lockout nametags to the
padlock.
Note: Note:The presence of a nametag on the padlock signals that the machine is being serviced
and that the lock is not to be removed.
NXTSAF006

4. In the same manner, rotate the air valve handle to the OFF position and lock with the
second padlock.
All personnel working on the machine should attach their nametags to the padlock.
NXTSAF005
5. The lockout is complete.

1.6.2 Unlocking procedure

When finished servicing the machine, all personnel should remove their lockout nametags
from the padlocks.
1. Confirm that all personnel are clear of the machine.
2. Confirm that the machine is in a safe condition. Remove the padlock from the air valve
and rotate the handle to the ON position.
NXTSAF007
3. Remove the padlock from the main switch and rotate it to the ON position.
NXTSAF008
4. This concludes the unlocking procedure.

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 2. Machine Components and Functions
2. Machine Components and Functions

This chapter explains the names of components on the machine, the details displayed at
the operation panel, and functions associated with the operation buttons.
2.1 Machine Components

The names shown below are for external and internal components of the machine.
2.1.1 Machine external components

Signal lamps Sub-signal lamps
Operation panel
Side 2
Module A
Front door
Sub-signal lamps
Front door
Module B
Operation panel
Feeder pallet
Side 1
Main switch
Feeder pallet 30SYS-0100E
2.1.2 Machine internal components
Placing head
XY robot
Parts camera
Nozzle station
Placing head
XY robot
Nozzle station
Convetor
Parts camera 30SYS-0101E

2. Machine Components and Functions SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
2.2 Operation Panel

This section explains each button on the operation panel and the operation screen.
2.2.1 Operation panel buttons
GROUP
START
READY ON
CYCLE STOP STOP

ENABLE LOCK
ENABLE / LOCK
MANUAL POWER
OK
CANCEL
MONITOR STANDBY Arrow keys 30SYS-0003
Buttons Function
GROUP Performs operations for multiple modules simultaneously.
READY ON Clears the error status for the module.
CYCLE STOP Stops production after completion of the current cycle.
ENABLE/LOCK Rotating the switch to the “ENABLE” or “LOCK” enables the

operation panel on that side, and disables the controls on the other
side of the machine.
MANUAL Toggles between manual command and autopilot operation.
MONITOR Toggles the display between the vision monitor and operation
screen.
START Starts production.
STOP Stops production after completion of the current panel.
POWER Wakes the module or if pushed for a long time, puts the module to
sleep.
OK Confirms and performs the selected module operation.
CANCEL Cancels an operation.
Arrow keys Changes the position of the cursor (focus) on the screen.
STANDBY Indicates that power is being supplied to the module.

2.2.2 Operation screen

The machine automatically determines the operations required for production and uses the
operation screen to help guide the operator.
Production mode screen

In production mode, the machine requests the operator to perform required actions as
shown at the screen below.
E
A
B C D 30SYS-0102E
The background changes to green when using production mode.
Explanation of each area

A: Guidance area
This area displays operation and changeover guidance as well as the machine status.
B: Panel loaded indicator area
This indicates whether or not a panel is present on the conveyor and the panel
production status.
Color Status
White No panel is present on the conveyor.
Light green A panel that is currently being produced is present on the conveyor.
Dark green A panel for which production is completed is present on the conveyor.
C: Job name area

This area displays the name of the current job. The upper row displays lane 2 and the lower
row lane 1.
D: Panels produced quantity area
This displays the quantity of panels that have been produced on that module.
E: Status display area
Items such as the module number, production status and the machine status are
displayed.
Module number display
Based on the position of the module

in the line 30SYS-0103E

These pictograms are displayed in the top row.

Production mode (conveyance mode) related displays
Dual lane production Lane 1: pass mode Lane 1: production

Lane 2: production Lane 2: pass mode
Lane 1: pass mode

Single lane production Single lane pass mode Lane 2: pass mode
Background color: Red

Single lane "breakdown" Dual lane "breakdown"
conveyor only mode conveyor only mode
Single lane idle Background color: Yellow

Single lane "breakdown" mode
conveyor only mode
IDLE VT253 Vision type 253, no conveyance
These pictograms are displayed in the second row.

Machine status related displays
Uploading image Feeder statistical Tray statistical

10 warning 11 warning
Nozzle statistical No waste tape box

Cleaning nozzles warning warning
Waste tape box

cleaning guidance
These pictograms are displayed in the third row.

Production status related displays
Holder skipped Board skip at machine

Side1 䋭 (holder number indicated) 11, 12, 13 (board number indicated)
Side2 C DEF 2, 3, 4, 5 䊶䊶䊶
These pictograms are displayed in the bottom row.

Scheduled job presence, panel unloading related displays
Next job present Stop operation
30SYS-0104aE
These pictograms are displayed in the bottom row
Green Green Yellow

Operation at side 1 Operation at side 2 Operation at side 2
is enabled is enabled is enabled and locked 30SYS-0105E

Manual mode screen

The manual mode screen displays as shown below after MANUAL is pushed. In this
operation mode, the operator selects the command to perform manually.
Example:
Head exchange command
30SYS-0121E
The background changes to brown when using manual mode.
A: Guidance area
This area displays the command menu and instructions for the operator.
Error display screen

The screen displays as illustrated below when an error occurs.
C D
30SYS-0106E
The background changes to yellow when an error is displayed.
A: Error location
This area indicates the location at which the area occurred.
B: Guidance area
This area displays the guidance for the operator.
C: Seek Number / Sub Code

This area displays the error code and sub error code which are useful for searching for
information about the error.
D: Error information
This area displays additional information relating to the error.
Other screens
Screens other to those shown here can display images of the parts camera and mark
camera.

2.3 Signal Lamps

The operator can determine the condition of a machine by checking which of the three color
lights are on, off, or flashing on the signal tower and listening to the buzzer.
Signal lamps are attached to both sides of the machine to indicate to the operator the status
of each side.
Note: Module A and module B share a single signal lamp.
Signal lamps
Side 2
Signal lamps
Side 1
Action Machine status Signal lamp

Priority (Situation) display
Checking the line All three colors are
1 (Checking Fuji Flexa settings) lit
Group operation with operation enable locked None of the three
2 (With the operation enable locked, GROUP is pushed at a colors are displayed
different module of the same line)
Group operation All three colors are
3 (GROUP is pushed) lit
An error occurred Red flashes and the
4 (An error occurred at the machine) buzzer sounds
None of the three
Both modules are in sleep mode
5 colors are
(Module A and B are in sleep mode) displayed
Manual mode
6 (When a manual command is used, or the machine is in PAM Green is lit
measurement mode or test mode)
Production stops Red flashes and the
7 (The machine is waiting for the operator to perform an action buzzer sounds
or a recovery limit is reached)
8
One of the modules is in sleep mode Green flashes
(Either module A or B is in sleep mode)
Production has not started
9 (When production has not started because changeover is Green flashes
being performed)
The machine is requesting some action from the operator
10 (When the machine is waiting for parts to be set after Yellow flashes
production begins)
Production is about to stop Red is lit and the
11 (When a part that cannot be picked is present) buzzer sounds
The throughput drops
12 Yellow is lit
(When parts with statistical warnings are present)

Action Machine status Signal lamp

Priority (Situation) display
Sending a message
13 Yellow flashes
(When showing a parts out warning)
Preparing for production
14 Green is lit
(When performing calibration)
Producing
15 Green is lit
(Production is being performed without any problems)
Waiting for previous or next stage
16 (When the machine is waiting for the panel to be conveyed Green flashes
from the previous stage or to the next stage)
Note: The signal lamp display can be changed in the Accessory Software settings. Refer to the
Fuji Accessory Software Operation Manual (online manual) for details.
2.4 Feeder Pallet Buttons and LEDs

The figure below shows items on the feeder pallet display.
Slot number
LEDs
Feeder set button 30SYS-0802E
The meaning of the colored LEDs is explained below.
LED display Slot status

Parts are no longer being picked from the feeder at this slot due to
some problem such as parts running out, a pickup error, or a vision
Red LED on
processing error. The feeder at this slot can be removed even during
production
Green or The feeder at this slot is supplying parts. Do not remove the feeder.
yellow LED on
Green and The feeder at this slot is specified as an alternate feeder when using
yellow LEDs the dynamic alternate feeder function and will be used to supply parts
on once the original feeder runs out of parts. Do not remove the feeder.
This is a slot specified for a part push sequence when using the
All three colors
function to push placed parts.
are lit
Parts are not picked up from this slot.

2.5 PCU (Pallet Change Unit)

The names shown below are for the PCU.
Handle
Clamp lever
30SYS-0765E

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 3. Basic Operation
3. Basic Operation
This chapter explains basic operations such as how to turn on power to the machine, how
to enable operation at each side of the machine, and how to switch between different
screens of the operation panel.
3.1 Turning ON/OFF the AIMEX

The diagram below illustrates the power transition stages on the AIMEX.
Power OFF
Main switch ON Main switch OFF
Sleep
Press POWER button Hold down POWER button
Awake NXTOPE043
Power OFF: The power supply to the machine is cut completely.

Power is being supplied to the control PCB, but not to the
Sleep: module hardware. Power can be supplied to the module
hardware quickly.
Awake: Both the hardware and software are booted up.
3.1.1 Turning on the AIMEX

1. Turn the power switch on in the middle of side 1.
Side 2
Side 1
30SYS-0006

3. Basic Operation SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
2. From this point, power is supplied to the base and modules. The modules will
automatically perform an initial boot up. Once the initial boot up is completed, the
modules automatically enter sleep (standby) mode.
ENABLE LOCK ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0803
3.1.2 Waking modules

Modules can be easily woken up. Once woken, modules will download the last job through
Fuji Flexa. Once the job information has been downloaded, the machine can enter
production mode.
1. Confirm that the STANDBY LED on the operation panel is illuminated.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0767
2. Push the POWER button. After the job has been downloaded, the following screen
displays.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

Module JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
1
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0768
Note: By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules in the line
set up in Fuji Flexa are woken.

3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode

When the machine is not in production mode, push and hold the POWER button for longer
than four seconds and then release. The module should then enter sleep mode.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
4 Seconds ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0769
Note: 1. By pushing and holding GROUP and then pushing POWER, all of the modules for the
base enter sleep mode.
2. Sleep mode cannot be used if there is a panel being produced still inside the module.
3.1.4 Turning off the AIMEX

This needs to be performed when repairs are being performed on the system, or the
machine is not going to be used for a long period of time.
1. Ensure that all modules are in the states shown below before cutting power to the
machine.
• Production or any type of processing is not being performed

• The main screen is displayed or the module is in sleep mode
Caution: Do not disconnect the power to the machine while upgrading. Refer to "11.1Upgrading
Machine Control Software" for details.
2. Turn the main power switch off. The power is cut to the components in the AIMEX
machine.
Side 2
Side 1
30SYS-0009

3.2 Enabling Operation at Each Side of the Machine

Parts can be supplied and maintenance can be performed at both side 1 and side 2 of the
machine. However, buttons on the operation panel can only be used at one side of the
machine at any time. Switch between sides to enable operation when necessary.
Operation panel
Side 2
Operation panel
Side 1
30SYS-0116E
3.2.1 How to enable operation

Rotate the ENABLE/LOCK switch on the operation panel to ENABLE. By rotating this
switch, operation is enabled at each side.
Module
1 2
Operation possible
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2
JOB Name Lane_1
_
ENABLE LOCK
at side 1.
ENABLE LOCK
Green
Operation possible
at side 2.
Green
30SYS-0770E

3.2.2 How to lock operation

When you want to continue enabling operation at one side, rotate the ENABLE/LOCK
switch to LOCK.
1 2
Operation locked to side 1.
Yellow
Operation locked to side 2.
Yellow
30SYS-0118E
It is possible to check that operation has been locked at one side by looking at the lighting
condition of the sub-signal lamp (option).
Note: For example, when locking operation at the operation panel of module A side 1, the sub-
signal lamp lights at side 1.
Side2
Sub-signal lamp (lit)
Operation locked
Side 1
30SYS-0119E

3.3 Displaying the Manual Mode Screen

The manual mode screen displays after MANUAL is pushed with the operation panel
displaying the main menu. Manual commands are used to perform actions other than
production such as maintenance.
Main screen Manual mode screen
Module Module
1 1
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2 1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1 JOB Name Lane_1
MANUAL button MANUAL button
30SYS-0107E
If MANUAL is pushed again while the manual mode screen is displayed, the operation
panel returns to the main menu.
Refer to "7.Using Manual Commands" for explanations on these commands.
3.4 Displaying the Changeover Guidance Screen

The changeover guidance screen displays after OK is pushed with the operation panel
displaying the main menu. The changeover guidance screen is used to prepare for
production by changing jobs and units.
Main screen Changeover guidance screen
Module Module
1 1

OK button
CANCEL button
30SYS-0120E
If CANCEL is pushed while the changeover guidance screen is displayed, the operation
panel returns to the main menu.
Refer to section "4.Preparing Production" for details on the changeover process.

3.5 Displaying the Image Monitor Screen

The image monitor allows operators to check the results of vision processing and vision
processing operations with the parts camera and mark camera.
Caution: The machine operates with the trace mode ON when image monitor is displayed. When
trace mode is ON, the placing cycle time will increase by approximately 20% due to a drop
in the vision processing speed.
Note: The buttons on the operation panel are disabled when the image monitor screen is
displayed. When it is necessary to use the buttons on the operation panel, change back to
the production mode screen to use them.
The method of changing to the image monitor screen is different for single robot machines
and twin robot machines.
3.5.1 Changing screens at a single robot machine

Display the image monitor screen by pushing MONITOR while the production screen is
displayed.
Production screen Image monitor screen
Module
Results of images captured with

the parts camera and mark
camera are displayed.
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
MONITOR button MONITOR button
30SYS-0122E
Pushing MONITOR again returns the operation panel to the production screen.

3.5.2 Changing screens at a twin robot machine

When MONITOR is pushed while the production screen is displayed, the image monitor
screen for side 1 is displayed. If MONITOR is pushed again, the image monitor screen at
side 2 is displayed.
Production screen Image monitor screen (Side 1)
Module

1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
MONITOR button MONITOR button
Image monitor screen (Side 2)

ENABLE LOCK
MONITOR button 30SYS-0123E
Pushing MONITOR again returns the operation panel to the production screen.

3.6 Opening the Door for a Module Side

Open the door for a module side when performing work such as attaching or removing a
placing head or nozzle station.
1. Ensure that the machine is stopped.
2. Use the handle to raise the door.
30SYS-0804
Caution
Open the door completely (move all the way up). Injury may occur
to any body parts in the machine if the door is not completely
opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might
come back down and injure any body parts in the way.

3.7 Stopping the Buzzer

The operator can determine that there is a problem at the machine when the buzzer
sounds.
The buzzer sound is produced from the speaker on the operation panel. To stop the buzzer
sound, push CANCEL at the operation panel.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0220
Note: Settings for the buzzer sound can be changed in Accessory Software. Refer to the Fuji
Accessory Software Operation Manual (online manual) for details.

3.8 Setting Feeders on Feeder Pallets

This section explains how to set feeders on feeder pallets.
Note: Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for details on how to set part reels on feeders.
1. Place the feeder guide into the slot on the feeder pallet.
30SYS-0143E
CAUTION
Ensure that the guide at the base of the feeder is set correctly into
the slot. If it is not inserted correctly, there is the danger of the
feeder colliding with the placing head.
Guide
Slot 01NST-0379
2. Slide the feeder forward.
30SYS-0144E

3. Lift up the lever, slide the feeder forward until the connector on the end of the feeder
connects with the feeder pallet, then insert fully.
01SYS-0663
4. Lever the lower. Check that the “PWR” LED turns on.
01SYS-0664
Note: If the feeder is not set correctly, power is not supplied and the PWR LED does not turn on.

5. When using W8, W04b(c), W8b(c/f) feeders with 7 inch reel holders, ensure that the reel
holders of every second feeder are extended downwards. It does not matter whether
the reel holders of odd-numbered slots or even-numbered slots are extended
downwards.
01SYS-0665
6. When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if
the feeder is the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn
green.
Slot No.
LED
30SYS-0148E
Note: The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.

3.9 Removing Feeders from the Feeder Pallet

This section explains how to remove feeders from feeder pallets. During automatic
operation, feeders in slots for which the red LED on the front cover is lit can be removed.
Slot No.
LED
30SYS-0141E
Caution: Do not remove feeders from slots where green or yellow LEDs are lit. The feeder may
collide with the nozzle during pickup and damage it.
1. Lift up the lever and pull the feeder out.
1
2
30SYS-0140
Note: If the feeder is removed forcibly without raising the lever, the board inside the feeder may
be damaged.
2. Grip the handle firmly and remove the feeder.

Caution: Be sure to firmly grip the handle to prevent the feeder from being dropped.
30SYS-0142

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 4. Preparing Production
4. Preparing Production
The following preparations are necessary to start production.
a. Transmit the job to be used in production to the machine.
b. Set the units and parts required for production on the machine.
c. Specify machine settings in Accessory Software.
AIMEX Fuji Flexa Accessory Software
Start machine Create job Specify settings
Turn power on Job Builder Machine configuration

settings
Set units Module configuration

settings
Heads
Nozzles Transmit job
Backup pins
Director
Feeder pallet
Tray units
Set parts
Feeders
Trays
30SYS-0805E
Note: To use the parts verification function, part master and part data must be registered in
Fujitrax Verifier and barcode labels must be printed.
This section explains how to set units on the machine. Also refer to this section for how to
perform changeover when a job is changed.
Refer to "9.Settings and Management" or the Accessory Software Operation Manual for
details on specifying settings in Accessory Software.

4. Preparing Production SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
4.1 Transmitting Jobs

A job contains the data required to produce the panel.
When Fuji Flexa transmits the job, the machine should be in the job waiting status.
1. Ensure that the operation panel at all modules in the line display one of the following
screens.
The following displays when waiting The following displays when the current job
for START to be pushed. does not exist in the module, however, the next job does.
Module
1 2
JOB Name Lane_1
The following displays when neither the current

or next job exists in the module.
30SYS-0712E
2. Transmit the job using Fuji Flexa. The screen below displays during transmission. (Refer
to the AIMEX series Programming Manual for further details on transmission.)
Note: The following pictogram displays while transmission if being performed.
Module
1 2
JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0713
3. The job name on the modules changes when transmission is complete.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0714
Note: The different jobs have been sent to lane 1 and lane 2 in the screen shown above.

4.2 Displaying Exchange Guidance for Each Unit

Set the units required for the job onto the machine. Perform the exchange work as directed
by the guidance on the operation panel.
30SYS-0806
4.2.1 Exchange guidance after transmitting the job

Exchange guidance displays if the units set on the machine do not match those required in
the job.
Camera exchange
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
Device unit exchange
30SYS-0773E
When more than one unit needs to be exchanged, guidance for the next unit to exchange
is displayed once procedures for the current unit are complete.

4.2.2 Exchange guidance after calibration

Calibration starts when the START button is pushed. If production preparations have not
been completed, guidance displays on the operation panel to set units and parts.
Backup plate exchange

Module
1 2
JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
Nozzle exchange
Tray parts exchange (TU-LT)

Feeder parts exchange
Tray parts exchange (TU-M)

Head exchange
30SYS-0774E
Note: If production preparations are complete, the machine starts production.
When more than one unit needs to be exchanged, guidance for the next unit to exchange
is displayed once procedures for the current unit are complete.
When all changeover operations have been completed, the machine returns to the main
screen.

4.2.3 Changeover menu exchange guidance

The operator can select items in the changeover menu to display exchange guidance for
that item.
In this case, the main screen changes to display the changeover guidance screen. Refer to
"3.3Displaying the Manual Mode Screen" for details on changing screens.
Changing the job

Module Module
1 1
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2 1 2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
Feeder batch exchange
Replacing nozzles
Replacing backup plates
Replacing feeders
Replacing the placing head
Setting trays
30SYS-0718E

Procedures how to display the menu screen

1. Use the arrow keys to select menu items. The currently selected item is displayed with
a green background.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0234
2. Push OK on the operation panel. If changeover is required, guidance is displayed. If

changeover is not required, information showing the current status of that item is
displayed.
Changeover guidance screen Information screen
30SYS-0235E
Note: The example screens shown above are for the nozzle replacement menu item.
If changeover work is required, following the guidance that displays.

4.3 Changing the Job

In order to change the current job, another job must have already been sent to the
background of the machine. For details on sending a job to the machine, refer to the AIMEX
series Programming Manual.
4.3.1 Job changeover guidance
Job changeover
and cancel pictograms
Name of the background job
30SYS-0236E
• Use the arrow keys to select the job changeover pictogram or cancel pictogram.
• The name of the background job for lane 1 is displayed in the lower row. The
name of the background job for lane 2 is displayed in the upper row.
4.3.2 Job changeover procedures

The job is changed from the changeover guidance screen.
1. Select the job changeover pictogram and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0237

2. Job changeover guidance is displayed. Use the arrow keys to select the job changeover
pictogram and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0238
3. The job in the background is changed to the foreground.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0239E

4.4 Feeder Batch Exchange

Feeder pallets are replaced so that feeders can be exchanged as a batch. Feeders for the
next production are loaded onto a spare feeder pallet which is used to replace the feeder
pallet currently being used at the machine. This helps minimize changeover time.
4.4.1 Feeder batch exchange guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The guidance displayed shows the use of a PCU (pallet change unit).
30SYS-0240E
4.4.2 How to perform feeder batch exchange

Feeder batch exchange is performed from the changeover guidance screen. Enable
operation at the side to perform batch exchange and then follow the procedure below.
1. Select the [Feeder batch exchange] pictogram and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0241
2. Exchange guidance is displayed at the screen. Exchange the feeder pallet by following
the instructions in the guidance.

Removing the feeder pallet

1. Remove the waste tape box and then position the PCU in front of the machine.
2. Rotate the handle on the PCU until the indicator on the PCU matches the conveyance
height of the machine.
Note: The indicator shows the conveyance height of the panel in millimeters. Be careful that the
pointer on the indicator does not enter the range marked in red (880 or less, 980 or more).
PCU
880
900
920
940
960
980
Align with the panel

conveyance height.
Handle
30MEC-0033E
3. Slide the PCU guides into the feeder pallet rail and then firmly push the PCU forward
until the stopper makes contact.
Feeder pallet
PCU
Rails
Guides
30MEC-0034E

4. Push down on the PCU lever to clamp the unit to the feeder pallet.
Caution: The lever cannot be operated unless the PCU is correctly attached to the machine.
The clamp pins

are raised
Lever
30SYS-0246E
5. Push OK at the operation panel.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0242
6. Slowly pull the PCU away from the machine to remove the feeder pallet.
PCU
30MEC-0036

Attaching a feeder pallet

1. Prepare a feeder pallet with feeders set on it.
2. Align the feeder pallet rollers with the guides on the feeder base and then firmly push
the PCU towards the machine until the stopper makes contact.
Feeder pallet roller

guide
30SYS-0243E
3. Lift the PCU lever.
Lever
30SYS-0244E
4. Slowly pull the PCU away from the machine to leave the feeder pallet on the machine.
30SYS-0245E

5. Push the feeder set buttons on the front cover.
Slot No.
LED
30SYS-0148E
Note: Push all buttons that are lit with a red LED.
6. Put the waste tape box back in the machine.

4.5 Replacing Feeders

Set the part tape on feeders in advance. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for
details on how to set part tape on feeders.
4.5.1 Feeder replacement guidance screen

It is possible to switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder
allocation list by pressing [OK].
Screen change guidance
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Parts out warning time (min)
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
[8]: 8 mm width paper or
embossed tape
[8PB]: 8 mm width black flat tape
Device comment
Feeder setup guidance
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Pitch
Width
embossed tape
Device comment
Feeder allocation list 30SYS-0139aE
The feeder setup guidance screen displays the feeders which are required for changeover.
The feeder allocation list screen displays the slots at which feeders need to be set. The
screen can be changed to display information for all feeders by pushing the up and down
arrow keys.
Note: Follow the procedures displayed on the guidance screen to perform feeder changeover. It
is also possible to perform feeder changeover during production. Procedures for loading
and unloading tape feeders are shown in this section. The same procedures can be used
for stick feeders.

4.5.2 Removing and attaching feeders

When using Fujitrax Verifier, it is necessary to create a relationship between the feeder and
the parts reel. For details, refer to Fujitrax Verifier User Manual.
Enable operation at the side to perform feeder exchange and then follow the procedure
below.
1. The feeders that need to be replaced or checked are located in the slot positions where
the LEDs on the front cover are red.
Slot No.
LED
30SYS-0141E
2. Remove the feeder. Refer to "3.9Removing Feeders from the Feeder Pallet" for details
on removing feeders.
30SYS-0142
3. Set the feeder with new parts into the slot. Refer to "3.8Setting Feeders on Feeder
Pallets" for details on setting feeders.
30SYS-0143E

4. When the feeder is set in position, press the set button for the number of that slot and if
the feeder is the correct type with the right pitch and set properly, the set LED will turn
green.
Slot No.
LED
30SYS-0148E
Note: The operation above is not necessary when Fujitrax Verifier is used.
After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the
feeder is displayed at the feeder set guidance. If the set button is pushed again, information
for the feeder is cleared.
Set information
Stage number
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Tape width
[8]: 8 mm width paper
or embossed tape
Device comment 30SYS-0149E

4.5.3 Operation when using the free allocation function

This section contains information about removing and inserting feeders when using the free
allocation function.
Parts out conditions that occur during production can be checked at either of the screens
listed below. Check the parts out condition at the screen which is most convenient (this will
vary depending on whether or not Kit Handy is used and the location of the computer).
a. the machine operation panel

b. Kit Handy
c. Kit Manager
Note: Check the machine operation panel if it is not necessary to perform quick verification (for
example, when a feeder for which parts reel information has been created is already
prepared). Check the screen at Kit Handy or Kit Manager if it is necessary to perform quick
verification while setting the feeder.
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as
when the free allocation function is not being used. For details, refer to section
"4.4.1Feeder batch exchange guidance screen". Also, if a feeder is already set in the slot
which is specified in the job, then an asterisk (*) is displayed in the [Slot] column.
01SYS-0191E
Note: If a feeder is not already set in the slot which is specified in the job, then a slot number is
displayed. In the screen shown above, slot 9 is displayed, but the feeder can be set in any
slot.
When using Kit Handy, check the [Status] column at the part status list screen (shown
below). An asterisk (*) is displayed in the location column of the slots which require feeders
to be set. When using Kit Manager, check for an asterisk (*) at the list view.
Slot without feeder
1-1-11-0
Slot number
01SYS-0192E
Note: In the screen shown above, guidance for setting the feeder which is specified for slot 11 in
the job is displayed.

Procedure for inserting and removing feeders

1. If any of the units used below are used in production, they must be set in the slot which
is specified in the job.
a. Reject parts conveyor
b. Dip flux unit
2. Check the appropriate screen at either Kit Handy or Kit Manager. Select the slot(s) for
which [No Feeder] is displayed and perform quick verification. If quick verification has
already been performed, check the machine operation panel.
3. Set the new feeder into any slot. The feeder can be set at any slot on the same stage of
the specified module. Refer to"3.8Setting Feeders on Feeder Pallets" for details on
setting feeders.
Note: If no empty slots exist, remove a feeder that is not used in production. Feeders which are
not being used can be identified by checking the LED above the feeders on the front cover
of the module. The LED is not lit for slots at which feeders are not being used.
4. Ensure that the LED on the front cover of the machine is green for the feeder which was
set.
5. Repeat the procedures above until all necessary feeders have been set.
Note: Due to the difference in the number of slots occupied by different feeders, there are cases
when it is not possible to set all feeders depending on the allocation. When using a job that
requires several different feeder types, set the narrowest feeders (the feeders occupying
the fewest number of slots) in the lowest possible slot numbers (slot 1, 2, ....).

4.6 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-LT

Set trays parts as indicated in the guidance.
4.6.1 Tray setting guidance screens

The guidance that displays depends on whether Fujitrax Verifier is being used or not.
When using Fujitrax Verifier
Slot Device information Screen change guidance
Operation guidance
Slot
"A", "B" indicates the magazine position. (A: upper, B: lower)
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot (slot numbers 1 to 12).
The background color of the selected slot changes to green.
If position "A-12" is selected and the down arrow key is pushed,
position "B-1" is selected.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark. When setting trays in
a slot is completed, the red mark changes to blue.
Original device Position from which pickup is currently
Alternate device being performed
Pickup is not performed at slots that have a white mark.
Slots specified for pushing parts.
Device information
The magazine and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are
displayed for the currently selected slot.
The estimated remaining time (minutes) for parts to run out is displayed.
Operation guidance
Necessary operations are displayed for the selected slot.
Use the right/left arrow keys to change the screen.
Setting feeder parts
Specify pickup point (not available when using Verifier)

Set tray parts (not available when using Verifier) 30SYS-0154E

When not using Fujitrax Verifier
Operation guidance
Slot

Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the pickup point

Setting tray parts
Setting feeder parts 30SYS-0162E

4.6.2 Setting trays

Enable operation at the side to set trays and then follow the procedure below.
Removing tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. There are two front doors on the tray unit-LT.
Open the door for the area that you are supplying trays.
Front door
Front door
30SYS-0155E
2. Check the slots to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition,
the LED for the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is flashing.
LED 01SYS-0246
3. Use the knob on the drawer stopper to raise the stopper.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0156E
CAUTION
If supply work is performed without raising the tray drawer stopper,
the tray drawer and magazine may be damaged.

Note: With the tray drawer stopper lowered, tray drawers can be pulled out about halfway. This is
designed so that the operators can check the part condition. When supplying parts, be sure
to raise the tray drawer stopper.
4. Remove the tray drawer from the slot to be resupplied.
01SYS-0719
Verifying tray parts

This work is only required when using Fujitrax Verifier.
1. Verify the tray using Kit Manager or Kit Handy.
Kit Handy
30SYS-0157E
a. At Kit Handy or Kit Manager, select the slot for which part supply is to be performed.
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray
verification with position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the
DID (tray).
Note: For details on verifying trays refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax Verifier
User Manual.
2. You can specify the first part to pick up using Kit Handy. Refer to"4.6.4Setting the pickup
position" for details.

Inserting tray parts into slots

1. Set the tray(s) in the tray drawer.
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
2. Gently set the tray drawer in the appropriate slot.
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
Caution: When setting the tray drawer in the slot, set it gently so as to not jar the trays.
Note: If you wish to change the display to supply trays for other slots, use the up and down arrow
keys on the operation panel to select the slot and then set trays.
3. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to"4.6.4Setting the pickup position" for
details.
4. Push OK with the slot for which you are performing supply work selected.
Note: Steps 3 and 4 are not required if using Fujitrax Verifier.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0776

5. If there is guidance for setting trays in other drawers, repeat the previous steps until all
necessary trays have been set.
6. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when supplying trays is complete.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0158E
7. Use the knob on the drawer stopper to lower the stopper.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0160E
8. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is started.
30SYS-0161
Note: Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LT.

4.6.3 Changing magazines

It is possible to remove the upper and lower magazines in the tray unit-LT. It is possible to
reduce changeover time by changing the previous job magazines with magazines that
already have the trays set in them during changeover on the tray unit-LT.
30SYS-0247
CAUTION
When changing magazines, be very careful to not drop a magazine.
Personal injury and machine damage could result if a magazine is
dropped.
When handling a magazine with trays loaded in it, handle it gently
so the tray parts are not scattered.
Enable operation at the side to perform magazine batch exchange and then follow the
procedure below.
Removing magazines
1. Push the MAGAZINE CLAMP button. There are two magazines, a top magazine and a
bottom magazine. Push the button for the magazine you want to change.
Note: The magazine clamp in the tray unit-LT is released.
30SYS-0248

2. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. Open the door to the magazine you want to
change.
Front door
Front door
30SYS-0155E
3. Remove the magazine from the tray unit-LT by following the sub steps below.
a. Slide the magazine stopper over.
30SYS-0250E
b. Slowly pull forward the plate that the magazine is set on until it is locked into position.
Magazine
Plate 01SYS-0244
c. Slide the magazine forward a short distance, and then remove it from the tray unit-
LT.
Magazine
01SYS-0245

Attaching magazines
1. Load the magazine that has the trays set in it in the tray unit-LT by following the sub
steps below.
a. Confirm that the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons are not lit.
30SYS-0777
Note: With the MAGAZINE CLAMP buttons lit, even if a magazine is set, clamping will not operate
correctly.
Also, if magazines are set with power to the tray unit-LTW off, it is necessary to check by
eye the position of the magazine side clamper.
Confirm that the side clamper

sticks out.
01SYS-0355E
b. Set the magazine on the plate and slide it back until the magazine position is set by
the positioning pins.
Positioning pins
Magazine
Plate 01SYS-0247

c. Move the lever to unlock the plate and gently push in the magazine.
Magazine
Lever
01SYS-0248
d. Slide back the magazine stopper to lock the magazine.
30SYS-0252E
2. Check all the parts that are set in the magazine to ensure that they are correct by
following the sub steps below.
a. Check the tray parts for the slot that has the lit LED, and if the parts are correct, then
push OK on the operation panel.
LED 01SYS-0246
b. Specify the first part to pick up here. Refer to "4.6.4Setting the pickup position" for
details.
c. While checking the operation panel, repeat steps a and b for all slots that require
trays.

d. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0158E
3. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. When exchanging the other
magazine, repeat these procedures up to this step.
30SYS-0161

4.6.4 Setting the pickup position

It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-
LT from Kit Handy or the operation panel on the machine.
Specifying the pickup position on the machine

The pickup point setting screen at the machine is accessed from the tray exchange
guidance screen.
1. When the tray exchange guidance screen is displayed, push the right arrow key.
Module
1 Screen change guidance
Pickup position pictogram

1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0168E
2. The pickup position settings screen is displayed. Use the arrow keys to set the values
for X and Y.
Module
X Y
1 3
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0169
• The default values for pickup position settings are the current pickup position.
• The numbers displayed at the corners of the tray diagram (for example (7, 5))
represent the tray dimensions.
: Increases the pickup point for X by 1. : Increases the pickup point for Y by 1.
: Decreases the pickup point for X by 1. : Decreases the pickup point for Y by 1.
30SYS-0170E

3. Once the correct setting has been specified, push OK.
• If a tray is set in subslot 2, then the display changes to display the pickup
position point setting guidance for subslot 2.
• If there is no tray set in subslot 2 or the subslot 2 setting is completed, then the
tray exchange guidance is redisplayed.
Note: If CANCEL is pushed, the setting is cancelled.
Specifying the pickup position from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps on a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-LT.
2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.
30SYS-0171E
Note: 1. If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point
becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
2. The specification for the part supply direction is different depending on the direction of the
tray set in the drawer even if the same tray is used.
Direction 0 Direction 90
(X, Y) = (4, 4)
(X, Y) = (1, 4)
Direction 180 Direction 270
(X, Y) = (4, 3)
(X, Y) = (3, 1)
30SYS-0172E
3. Tap [OK].

4.6.5 Caution when inserting trays into the Tray unit-LT

1. The tray drawer has direction. When setting trays in the drawer and loading the drawers
in the Tray unit-LT, be careful to use the correct direction.
2. The yellow lines on the drawer indicate the positions checked by the tray height sensors.
Be careful not to place any tall items such as magnets on these yellow lines.
3. Do not insert tray drawers in a tilted manner.
4. Gently open and close the doors so not to jar parts. For safety reasons, the doors are
automatically locked and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the doors when they are
locked.
5. At the side (stage) where parts supply guidance is displayed, operation guidance is
displayed if parts supply cannot be performed at that side. Change sides and supply
parts.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0778
4.6.6 Cautions when using parts with height 25.4 mm or more

1. A dedicated tray unit-LT (1.5 inch compatible) is required. When attaching a standard
tray unit-LT to a machine, changeover guidance displays after completing calibration.
30SYS-0256E

2. When supplying parts from the designated resupply magazine, four slots must be left
empty to be used for drawer rejection.
Slots that can be used are from 1 to 8 because

4 slots must remain empty.
30SYS-0257E
Note: If parts with height 25.4 mm or more are not used, only 3 slots need to be empty.

4.7 Setting Trays on a Tray Unit-M

Set trays parts as indicated in the guidance.
4.7.1 Tray setting guidance screen

The guidance that displays depends on whether Fujitrax Verifier is being used or not.
When using Fujitrax Verifier
Operation guidance
Slot
"A" and "B" represent the position in which the tray unit-M is set on the feeder pallet (A: left, B: right).
"A" is not displayed when operation is being performed with the tray unit-M set on only one side.
Push the up and down arrow keys to select a slot (slot numbers 1 to 10). The background color
of the selected slot changes to green.
When slot "A-10" is currently selected, pushing the down arrow key will display slot "B-1".
Supply trays to the slot designated by the red mark. The red mark will change to a blue mark
once a tray has been set.
Original device Device from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate device
Device information
The position and slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment and pickup direction are displayed for the currently selected slot.
Operation guidance

Use the arrow keys to change screens.

Set tray parts (not available when using Verifier)
Set feeder parts (when one tray unit-M is set) 30SYS-0173E

When not using Fujitrax Verifier
Operation guidance
Slot
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance

Specify pickup position

Set tray parts

4.7.2 Setting trays (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

Enable operation at the side to set trays and then follow the procedure below.
Removing trays
1. Open the tray unit-M door.
Front door
30SYS-0174E
2. Raise the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
30SYS-0175E
3. Remove trays from slots which require resupply.
30SYS-0721


This work is only required when using Fujitrax Verifier.
Kit Handy
30SYS-0157E
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.
Note: 1. For details on verifying trays refer to section "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax
Verifier User Manual.
2. After scanning the part barcode or the DID, the first pickup position for the tray parts can
be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy. For details, refer to section
"4.7.3Setting the pickup position" in this manual.
2. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, set it here. For more details, refer to
"4.7.3Setting the pickup position".

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed at the machine
operation panel.
30SYS-0176E
Note: Gently set the tray into the tray unit to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged.
2. Specify the first part to pick up here. For more details, refer to "4.7.3Setting the pickup
position".

Note: Steps 2 and 3 are not required if using Fujitrax Verifier.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0779
5. Guidance to push COMPLETE displays when all of the trays have been checked.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0780
6. Lower the tray stopper.
Tray stopper
30SYS-0178E

7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE.
30SYS-0179E
Note: Gently close the door to prevent parts in the tray unit from becoming dislodged.
4.7.3 Setting the pickup position

It is possible to specify the first pickup position for trays when setting them in the tray unit-
M from Kit Handy or on the machine from the pickup position screen.
Specifying the pickup position on the machine

The pickup point setting screen at the machine is accessed from the tray exchange
guidance screen.
1. When the tray exchange guidance screen is displayed, push the right arrow key.
Module
1 Screen change guidance
Pickup position pictogram

1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0181E

2. Specify the new pickup position for X (columns) and Y (rows). Use the arrow buttons to
change the X and Y values.
Module
X Y
1 1
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0182E
• When this guidance is first displayed, the current pickup point is automatically
specified.
• The values displayed in the brackets (for example (5,10)) represent the cavity
number for X and Y.
: Increases the pickup point for X by 1. : Increases the pickup point for Y by 1.
: Decreases the pickup point for X by 1. : Decreases the pickup point for Y by 1.
30SYS-0170E
3. Once the correct setting has been specified, push OK.

Note: If CANCEL is pushed, the setting is cancelled.
Specifying the pickup position from Kit Handy

Perform the following steps using a Kit Handy.
1. Use Kit Handy to read the barcode of the tray that will be supplied to the tray unit-M.
2. Specify the column (X) and row (Y) for the first pickup cavity in Kit Handy.
30SYS-0171E
Note: If a position outside of the tray or where no part exists is specified, the first pickup point
becomes invalid and a dialog box is displayed.
3. Tap [OK].

4.7.4 Cautions when inserting trays into the Tray unit-M

1. The tray has direction. When setting trays in the tray unit-M, be careful to use the correct
direction.
2. Gently open and close the door so not to jar parts. If parts are jarred, they can become
dislodged from the tray cavities. For safety reasons, the door is automatically locked
and cannot be opened. Do not try to open the door when it is locked.
3. Do not use trays that have cutouts in the upper right corner.
Cutout
NXTMTU070E
4. At the side (stage) where parts supply guidance is displayed, operation guidance is
displayed if parts supply cannot be performed at that side. Change sides and supply
parts.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0778

4.8 Replacing Backup Plates

Set the backup plate and conveyor width to match the width of the panel being produced.
4.8.1 Important point when replacing backup plates

Cautions for exchanging backup plates are listed below.
WARNING
Do not touch the Y-axis linear motor in a module immediately after
production is stopped. Contact with the shaft or coil section could
cause burns.
CAUTION
When manually moving the XY-robot, only use the X-axis or Y-axis
handle to move it. If another location is used, the guide rails may be
damaged. Do not push or pull on the body of the head or use the
handle on the head to move the XY robot position.
For module with twin robots, be careful when moving an XY-robot so it
does not hit the head on the other XY-robot.
When working close to the Y-axis linear motor (within 55 mm) do not
use ordinary metal tools. Use only nonmagnetic tools.
Keep magnetic cards, wristwatches and other precision machines
away from the Y-axis linear motor (do not bring within 55 mm).
Damage to items may occur due to the magnetic field.
Do not hit the linear scale when exchanging the head and performing
maintenance. If the linear scale is damaged then errors will occur and
production may not be possible. In this case it will be necessary to
replace the linear scale.
Handle
Handle
Linear motor
Handle
Linear scale
Handle
30SYS-0263E

4.8.2 Backup plates replacement guidance screen
Module
1
Exchange guidance
Operation procedures
1 2
Exchange guidance
The type of back-up plate required for exchange is displayed.

ndicates back-up plates which support automatic back-up pin allocation.
30SYS-0258E
4.8.3 Removing and attaching backup plates

Enable operation at the side to perform backup plate exchange and then follow the
procedure below.
1. Push OK on the operation panel.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0781
2. Carefully remove the unclamped feeder pallet or tray unit-LT.
30SYS-0782

3. Open the door for that module side.
Caution
4. Remove the current backup plates. Remove any backup pins on the backup plates
before removing them.
5. Attach the new backup plate used in the next job.
Note: Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference manual for details on
how to remove and install backup plates.
6. Set the necessary backup pins on the backup plates. If using the automatic backup pin
allocation function, then set the auto backup pins in the stocker.
Stocker
Backup pins
01SYS-0280E
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0784
8. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.
9. Close the door for that module side.
10.Set the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT at the machine.
11.Specify conveyor width settings in Accessory Software to match the size of the backup
plate you inserted.

If the backup plates being inserted are smaller than standard backup plates, work may be
difficult if the conveyor width is wide. In this case, use the backup plate exchange command
in manual commands to move the conveyor rails forward.
4.8.4 Areas in which backup pins can be placed

The areas in which backup pins can be placed are given below.
Unit: mm 244.5 252.0
Panel
Possible placing area Module center Panel center
for backup pins
18.0
19.0
Panel size-33
A
A
48 to 280 mmspecifications㸸291.5
㻔standard type)
15.0
2.0 2.0
Panel Stopping Position Offset. 260.0 30SYS-0856-E
• The areas where backup pins can be allocated are the same for both double
conveyor machines and single conveyor machines.
• Backup pins cannot be allocated in the area 2 mm from the panel edge.
• The center position of the panel moves according to the value specified for
[Panel Stopping Position Offset] in the machine configuration settings in Job
Builder. Consider the set value when allocating backup pins.
• If positions of backup pins are specified outside the range shown in the figure
above, an error is displayed during a data check.
4.8.5 Cautions when allocating backup pins

When allocating backup pins to the backup plate, be sure to take into consideration the
position of premounted parts on the bottom side of the panel. Allocate backup pins so that
they do not collide with premounted parts.
01SYS-0518

4.8.6 Cautions when using the optional soft backup pins

Note the following three points when using the soft backup pins.
a. Deviations in the panel position
b. Restrictions for pre-mounted parts
c. Possible positioning range
Deviations in the panel position

If the height of a pre-mounted part on the panel is large, there are instances when the panel
position can deviate when it comes into contact with the ascending soft backup pins before
the panel is clamped. (Depending on the shape of the part and the weight of the panel,
different conditions occur.)
The panel is lifted up, causing

Pre-mounted part a deviation in the position.
Clamp direction NXTBAS233E
Change the position of the backup pin so that it does not come into contact with the pre-
mounted part. Another option is to cut off the pin that comes into contact with the pre-
mounted part.
Cut pin
Block moved
NXTBAS234E
Restrictions for pre-mounted parts

The height of a pre-mounted part on the lower surface of the panel must be less than 13
mm. When a pre-mounted part exceeds 13 mm in height, it is longer than the soft backup
pins, thus the part collides with the base of the backup pin block and the panel cannot be
clamped.
Panel
Position with the panel clamped
Pre-mounted part
13 mm or less
Block
NXTBAS235E

Possible positioning range

There are two different sizes for the soft backup pins. By using these for different positions,
it is possible to support many sizes of panels.
W=33 mm
W=45 mm
If the panel width is less than 65 mm,

then use the 33 mm wide soft backup pins.
01SYS-0250E

4.9 Replacing Nozzles

Set the nozzles specified in the job in the nozzle station.
4.9.1 Nozzle replacement guidance screen

Exchange guidance Nozzle status Nozzle list
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The type of nozzle station required for exchange is displayed.
If nozzle station changeover is not necessary, only the currently set nozzle station type displays.
Nozzle status
The status of the nozzle set in each nozzle cavity is displayed.
The background color varies depending on the status of the nozzle.
1 White: Nozzle changeover is necessary.
1 Red: An error occurred during 2D barcode reading. Clean the 2D barcode or exchange
the nozzle with another nozzle of the same type.
1 Yellow: A statistical error occurred for the nozzle. Clean the 2D barcode or exchange
the nozzle with another nozzle of the same type.
1 Green: The nozzle can be used in production.
30 Black: No nozzle exists in the cavity.
Nozzle list
The nicknames of all nozzles that should be set are displayed.
The colored circle is used to distinguish between nozzle types. The same colored circle appears
on the flange surface of the nozzle.
Push the down arrow key to scroll the nozzle list. 30SYS-0259E
Note: If all nozzles required for production are not set in the nozzle station, nozzle types that need
to be set are displayed at the nozzle exchange guidance screen. Follow the guidance and
set the required nozzle types into the nozzle station.

4.9.2 Removing and attaching nozzles

Enable operation at the side to perform nozzle exchange and then follow the procedure
below.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0785
30SYS-0782
Caution

4. Remove the nozzle station by pulling the level towards the front of the module and lifting
the front half of the nozzle station upwards.
Nozzle station
Lever
30SYS-0260E
5. Prepare the nozzle station to set in the module.
6. Slide the plate over as shown below and insert the required nozzles as shown on the
guidance screen.
Plate Nozzle
NXTNZS004
CAUTION
When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the
nozzle with the alignment pin in the nozzle station and make sure
that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.
Socket
Cutout Pin NXTNZC024E

7. Return the station by moving the red lever on the left side of the nozzle station towards
the front of the module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then push
down on the front end of the station.
Lever 2
30SYS-0261E
CAUTION
Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station
when loading it in the machine.
8. Return the lever back to its original position.
9. Confirm that the nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.
10.If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.
11.Close the door for that module side.
12.Set the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT at the machine.
13.This completes the replacement work for nozzles. When storing nozzles, store them in
an environment where the humidity is 30% or less.

4.9.3 Nozzle list

Useable nozzles are listed below. Nozzles can be distinguished by a color circle on the
flange surface.
Color circle
Color circle
NXTNZC022
Nozzle size H12HS(Q) V12 H08M(Q)

Color
(mm) nozzle (ID) nozzle (ID) nozzle (ID)
Dia. 0.3 Gray AA1ATxx (S10) -
Dia. 0.4 Yellow AA056xx (S11) AA8LSxx (K11)
Dia. 0.5 Dark red 2AGKNG0041xx (S60) -
Dia. 0.5 C Dark red 2AGKNG0149xx (S63) -
Dia. 0.5 CS Dark red 2AGKNG0208xx (S60) -
Dia. 0.7 Blue AA057xx (S12) AA8DXxx (K12)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA058xx (S13) AA8LTxx (K13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA20Axx (S14) AA8DYxx (K14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange AA064xx (S34) AA8MNxx (K34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA20Bxx (S15) AA8LWxx (K15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange AA19Gxx (S35) AA8MRxx (K35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA20Cxx (S16) AA8LXxx (K16)
Dia. 2.5 MELF Orange AA065xx (S36) AA8MSxx (K36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA0WTxx (S56) AA8MExx (K56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA20Dxx (S17) AA8LYxx (K17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA18Cxx (S57) AA8MFxx (K57)
Dia. 5.0 Medium purple AA20Exx (S18) AA8LZxx (K18)
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA063xx (S58) AA8MGxx (K58)
Dia. 7.0 Medium purple - AA8MAxx (K19)
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red - AA8MHxx (K59)
Dia. 10.0 Medium purple - AA8MBxx (K20)
Dia. 10.0 G Navy - AA8MKxx (K60)
Dia. 15.0 Medium purple - AA8MCxx (K21)
Dia. 15.0 G White - AA8MLxx (K61)
Dia. 20.0 Medium purple - AA8MDxx (K22)
Dia. 20.0 G Gray - AA8MMxx (K62)
Jig AA06Axx (J01) - AA8KKxx (J23)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZLxx (J06) AA4ZLxx (J06) -
Jig (for HBC glass parts) - - -
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AGxx (J16) AA7AGxx (J16) AA7AGxx (J16)

Nozzle size H04 nozzle H01/H02(F)

Color
(mm) (ID) nozzle (ID)
Dia. 1.0 Pink AA06Wxx (T13) AA0ASxx (L13)
Dia. 1.3 Green AA06Xxx (T14) AA0AXxx (L14)
Dia. 1.3 MELF Orange - AA0MZxx (L34)
Dia. 1.8 Aqua AA06Yxx (T15) AA0HSxx (L15)
Dia. 1.8 MELF Orange - AA11Rxx (L35)
Dia. 2.5 Purple AA06Zxx (T16) AA0HTxx (L16)
Dia. 2. 5 MELF Orange - AA0MLxx (L36)
Dia. 2.5 G Purple AA07Fxx (T56) AA084xx (L56)
Dia. 3.7 Yellow-green AA07Axx (T17) AA0HWxx (L17)
Dia. 3.7 G Yellow-green AA07Gxx (T57) AA085xx (L57)
Medium AA07Bxx (T18)
Dia. 5.0 AA0HXxx (L18)
purple
Dia. 5.0 G Red AA07Hxx (T58) AA072xx (L58)
Medium AA07Cxx (T19)
Dia. 7.0 AA080xx (L19)
purple
Dia. 7.0 G Dark red AA07Kxx (T59) AA073xx (L59)
Medium AA07Dxx (T20)
Dia. 10.0 AA081xx (L20)
purple
Dia. 10.0 G Navy AA07Lxx (T60) AA074xx (L60)
Medium AA07Exx (T21)
Dia. 15.0 AA082xx (L21)
purple
Dia. 15.0 G White AA07Mxx (T61) AA075xx (L61)
Medium -
Dia. 20.0 AA083xx (L22)
purple
Dia. 20.0 G Gray - AA076xx (L62)
Jig AA0EXxx (J02) AA05Zxx (J03)
Jig (for angle correction) AA4ZMxx (J07) AA50Sxx (J08)
Jig (for HBC glass parts) AA7AHxx (J17) AA78Exx (J11)
Jig (for HBC chip parts) AA7AKxx (J18) AA78Fxx (J12)
Note: 1. HBC stands for hybrid calibration.

2. Do not set nozzles with rubber pads (for example, 2.5G or 5.0G) when using a head with
a parts presence check sensor attached. The presence of parts cannot be checked when
using nozzles with rubber pads.

4.9.4 Nozzle station list

The useable nozzle stations are listed below.
Identification Identification
code code
Identification
code
01SYS-0377E
Identification
code (cavities) Supported head Notes
NC03C (3)
NC08C (8)
NC8LC (8） Tray unit-LT, Tray unit-M
NCPTC (16) H01/H02(F) Tray unit-LT, Long
NCKTC (11) Tray unit-LT, Long
NCFTC (6) Tray unit-LT, Short
NCETC (5) Tray unit-LT, Short
NE18A (18)
NE12A (12) Tray unit-LT, Tray unit-M
H04
NEXTA (24) Tray unit-LT, Long
NEPTA (16) Tray unit-LT, Short
NL30A (30)
NL16A (16) Tray unit-LT, Tray unit-M
NL17A (17) H08M, H08MQ Tray unit-LT, Tray unit-M
NL18A (18) Tray unit-LT, Short
NL36A (36)
ND32C (32) H12HS, H12HSQ,
ND36A (36) V12
NS0ZA (36) V12 V-Advance module

4.10 Replacing the Placing Head

Set the heads required for production on the XY robots.
4.10.1 Cautions when exchanging heads

Pay attention to the following points when exchanging heads.
CAUTION
The head or shaft can be damaged by the magnetic field generated
by the linear motor in the Y-axis. Keep the head away from the
shaft of the Y-axis. Also, the head should always be in the
exchange position (away from the linear motor) when attaching or
removing the head.
Do not strike the linear scale with foreign objects or damage it in
any way when exchanging heads or performing maintenance. If the
linear scale is damaged, errors will occur and production will not be
able to be performed. When this occurs, the linear scale must be
replaced.
For module with twin robots, be careful when moving an XY-robot
so it does not hit the head on the other XY-robot.
Handle
Handle
Linear motor
Handle
Linear scale
Handle
30SYS-0263E

4.10.2 Head replacement guidance screen
Exchange guidance
Procedures
Exchange guidance
The head type which is needed for exchange is displayed.
Indicates heads which are equipped with a backup pin picker.
Indicates heads which are equipped with a parts presence check sensor. 30SYS-0262E
4.10.3 Removing and attaching the placing head

Enable operation at the side to perform head exchange and then follow the procedure
below.
Removing the head

1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0787
30SYS-0782

Caution
4. Disconnect the connectors from the head. For the V12 head, remove connector 1, 2 and
3 in that order.
Connector Connector 3
1
2
Connector 1
Connector 2 3
<V12 head>
30SYS-0264E
Note: When removing placing heads from modules with twin robots, the operator must reach over
the top of the XY-robot to remove the connectors.
5. While holding the knob up, raise up the harness duct. The harness duct remains in a
raised position when the knob is released.
Harness duct
Knob

6. While holding the handle on the placing head, raise the clamp lever as far as it will go.
Pull the handle and then remove the head from the holder.
30SYS-0707
Note: The head may be difficult to remove from the holder due to a vacuum remaining inside the
head. In this case, slide the head up slightly to break the vacuum and allow air to leak in.
7. The removed placing head should be set on a head maintenance stand (option item) or
placed on its side on a work stand.
Attaching the head

1. Rest the head on the hook and then push it onto the XY-robot. Raise the clamp lever
and then pull it forward and down to clamp the head into the holder.
4
Clamp lever
Push the placing head

firlmy into the holder.
2
1
Holder
30SYS-0708E

2. Raise and hold the knob while lowering the connectors towards the head. Connect the
connectors to the head.
<V12 head>
3
2
Knob
30SYS-0709E
Note: If the handle for the head is a strap-type, ensure that the strap is flat against the head.
Interference or damage to the machine will occur if the strap is not flat against the head
when the head is attached.
Strap-type
handle
01SYS-0187E
3. Prepare a nozzle station that supports the head.
4. Set jig nozzles in the nozzle station. Refer to "4.10.4Setting nozzle jigs" for details.
Note: Jig nozzles are required when the head is exchanged because it is necessary to perform
calibration. Set the jigs nozzles at the same time as putting on the head. Even if the same
head type but with a different serial number is set on the machine calibration must still be
performed.
5. If any other changeover items need to be performed, perform them at this time.
7. Set the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT at the machine.

4.10.4 Setting nozzle jigs

First, prepare a compatible nozzle station for the head requested by the module. Gather
the same number of nozzle jigs as there is holders on the requested head. Follow the
procedure below to set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station.
1. Remove the current nozzle station from the module.
Nozzle station
Lever
30SYS-0260E
2. Slide the plate for the new nozzle station over as shown below and set the nozzle jigs in
the nozzle station. It does not matter in which position the nozzle jigs are set but it is
essential that the same number of nozzle jigs is set in the station as there are holders
on the new head.
Nozzle jig
Pit
Plate
NXTNZC023eE
Note: 1. The type of jig nozzle depends on the head type. Refer to "4.9.3Nozzle list" for details.
2. Hybrid calibration nozzle jigs must be set at machines that support hybrid calibration in
addition to the above nozzle jigs. Refer to "4.9.3Nozzle list" for details.
CAUTION
When setting nozzles in the nozzle station, align the cutout on the
nozzle with the alignment pin in the nozzle station and make sure
that the pin goes into the cutout. If they are not aligned, nozzle
exchange errors occur.
Socket
Cutout Pin NXTNZC024E

3. Set the nozzle station by moving the red lever on the left side of the nozzle changer
towards the front of the module and then insert the rear part of the station first and then
push down on the front end of the station.
Lever 2
30SYS-0261E
CAUTION
Be careful to not put your hands underneath the nozzle station
when loading it in the machine.
4. Return the lever back to its original position.
5. Ensure that the new nozzle station is fully seated on the nozzle changer base.

4.10.5 Before setting an H02F head

A plate must be exchanged as shown below depending on the machine type on which the
H02F head is to be set.
No backup pin picker With backup pin picker
NXT-3
NXT-3c 5
5
0.19 Nm 0.19 Nm
1 2
AIMEX
AIMEX-2
AIMEX-2S
NXT-2 5
5
NXT-2c 0.19 Nm 0.19 Nm
3 4
30SYS-0864-E
No. Part name (drawing number) Notes
1 Plate (2MGTHH0004xx)
For NXT-3, NXT-3c
2 Plate (2MGTHH0010xx)
3 Plate (2MGTHH0017xx) For AIMEX, AIMEX-2, AIMEX-2S,

4 Plate (2MGTHH0022xx) NXT-2, NXT-2c
5 Screw (2MGTHH0021xx) 4
Check the plate before setting the H02F head. If it is not a plate for the AIMEX, exchange it.
1. Remove the screws and remove the plate.

Caution: Store the removed plate in a safe place. The plate will be needed when setting the head on
an NXT-3(c).
2. Attach the AIMEX plate and secure with the screws.

3. Lower the 2 Z axes and confirm that the attached plate does not interfere with their
movement.
0.69 Nm
01SYS-0943
a. Remove the cover.
b. While holding the ball nuts for the Z-axes ball screws, squeeze both sides of the Z-
axes brake using your fingers to release the brake and gently move the axes to their
lowest positions (fully extended).
c. Confirm that the plate does not interfere with the movement of the Z axes.

4.11 Other Changeover

This section lists other types of changeover. If the units listed in this section have not been
properly prepared, changeover guidance will be displayed when the AIMEX is turned on.
4.11.1 Device type changeover
Exchange guidance
Exchange guidance
The next exchange guidance is shown.

Stage1 tray unit-LT -> feeder pallet
Feeder pallet -> tray unit-LT
The example shown above displays guidance for exchanging a feeder pallet
with a tray unit-L. Other types of exchanges are listed below.
Feeder pallet Tray unit-M
Tray unit-LT Tray unit-LT (option type)
Tray unit-LT Tray unit-M
The pictograms for the different units are shown below.
Tray unit-LT Tray unit-M
The pictograms shown below show optional items for the tray unit-LT.
1.5 inch 1.5 inch trays are supported

30SYS-0271E
For details on exchanging the tray unit-LT and tray unit-M, refer to "4. Basic Operation" of
the AIMEX Mechanical Reference.

4.11.2 Parts camera type changeover
Exchange guidance
Exchange guidance
The type of the parts camera required for exchange is displayed.
The example above shows guidance for exchanging a standard camera with a sidelight camera.
30SYS-0272E
For details on exchanging the parts camera, refer to "7. Replacing Parts" of the AIMEX
Mechanical Reference.
4.11.3 Changing between V-Advance and standard module guidance

AIMEX modules can be standard or V-Advance type modules. When the type is different
than that specified in the job, an error displays on the operation panel. Change the module
to match that of the job.
Refer to "8. Preparation Work to Support Various Functions" in the AIMEX Mechanical
Reference Manual for information on how to change a standard module to a V-Advance
module or how to change a V-Advance module to a standard module.
Important point when changing to a V-Advance module

After changing a standard module into a V-Advance module, measure the module camera
calibration data. Refer to "9.5.2 Module camera calibration" for details.
After measuring the calibration once, it is not necessary to remeasure again.

Note: If module camera calibration data has been measured, a plus "+" displays in the [Module
Type] item when the module information is displayed from the information command.
Indicates that module camera calibration

data has been measured.
30SYS-0466E

MEMO:

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 5. Production
5. Production
This chapter explains details about production.
5.1 Starting Production

1. After turning on the machine, push START at the main screen to begin production.
When calibration is complete, panels are loaded and production is commenced.
Module Module
1 1

30SYS-0114a
Note: The above screen displays when all changeover necessary for production has been
performed. Refer to "4. Preparing Production" for details on the changeover process.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0471

5. Production SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
5.2 Stopping Operation

The operation method is different for when you want to stop operation immediately or wait
for a panel to complete production and then stop the machine. Use the appropriate method
for the action that you wish to perform.
5.2.1 Cycle stop

1. Push CYCLE STOP to temporarily interrupt production at the next cycle.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0130
5.2.2 Finishing and unloading the current panels (Stop after

production of one board)
1. Push STOP to interrupt production after completion of the current panels loaded in that
module. After the current panel is unloaded, the STOP pictogram is displayed in the
status area at the operation panel of the module.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2 1 2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0131
2. Once the loaded panels have been completed, they are unloaded to the next machine
and the stop command is also sent to the module. Following this, the main screen
displays at the operation panel.

3. Production is continued in the following modules after loading the final panels until
production of those panels is completed. The module that is producing the final panels
displays the stop pictogram in the lower left corner of the operation panel.
Module 1 Module 2
30SYS-0132E
Note: If STOP is pushed again at the module with the stop pictogram, the STOP command is
cancelled and production continues.
Note: When unloading all panels from the line, push STOP at the first module in the line.
5.2.3 Emergency stop

Push EMERGENCY STOP to stop the machine immediately in the case of an emergency.
30SYS-0133a

5.3 Restarting Production

5.3.1 Restarting after cycle stop or after finishing and unloading
current panels
1. Push START.
a. When resuming production after a CYCLE STOP, production begins from the next
production sequence.
b. When production is resumed after the machine unloaded panels and stopped, the
machine loads the next panel and begins production.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0128
5.3.2 Restarting after an emergency stop

1. Ensure that the problem that resulted in the emergency stop has been resolved.
2. Release the EMERGENCY STOP button by turning in the clockwise direction.
Module
Side1&Side2
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2
JOB Name Lane_1
_
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0134
3. Push START.
1 2
JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0128

5.4 Supplying Feeder Parts

There are two basic options for supplying parts during production.
a. New part tape can be connected to the previous part tape for which parts are going
to run out soon.
b. By exchanging feeders during production, feeders with new reels of parts can be set.
(It is possible to supply parts without stopping the machine by using alternate
feeders. )
5.4.1 Splicing parts

When parts are going to run out soon, guidance to perform splicing is displayed.
Slot information
Stage No.
Slot No.
Feeder name
Index pitch
Tape width
[8]: 8 mm wide paper or emboss tape
[8PB]: 8 mm wide flat black tape
Device comment
30SYS-0455E
The proper splicing tools and items need to be available before starting the splicing
operation.
Tape cutter Splicing tool
NXTSPL006
Three splicing modes are available when using Fujitrax Verifier. Each method uses a
different procedure to verify parts.
Without DID mode 1 point verification mode 2 point verification mode
When not using Fujitrax Verifier, throughly ensure that the parts to be connected are correct
and then connect the carrier tapes together.
Verifying (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Check the parts out warning that is displayed at the operation panel of the machine, the
status screen of Kit Manager, or the part condition screen of Kit Handy.
2. Prepare a new parts reel that contains the same type of parts as the parts that are
currently being placed.
3. Start Kit Handy and click the Windows mark to display the start menu. Select [Kit Handy]
to display the logon screen.

4. Enter or select a user ID and click [OK] to display the Kit Handy menu.
5. Click [Parts Status List].
6. Enter or scan the name of the AIMEX for which splicing will be performed and click [OK].
7. At the Kit Handy screen, select [Mode] - [Splicing].
8. When using 1 point verification or without DID mode, use the following procedure.
a. All feeder positions that require splicing display at Kit Handy. Therefore, tap each
feeder position to be spliced.
b. Scan the DID for the new reel or the part barcode.
9. When using 2 point verification mode, use the following procedure.
a. Scan the DID of the reel being used in production with Kit Handy. Continue by
scanning the DID of the new reel.
10.After the DID or part barcode has been scanned, splicing can be performed if no
problem was found during the splicing check. However, if an error occurs, then the new
parts reel and the parts reel currently loaded on the feeder do not match and splicing
cannot be performed.
Splicing the carrier tape

1. Remove the old reel and unwind the remaining tape.
DID
Reel holder
30SYS-0135E
2. Using the splicing cutter, cut the tape at the correct position based on the tape pitch after
the last part on the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the tape.
New tape Existing tape
(P2) 2-pich
(P2) 2-pitch
Feed direction
(P4) 4-pich (P4) 4-pich Feed direction NXTSPL001

3. If not using Fujitrax, ensure that the parts are the same type.
4. Cut the new tape on the new reel at the correct position based on the tape pitch just
before the first part in the tape. Ensure that the top film is facing up when cutting the
tape.
5. Ensure that the top film can be peeled back from the starting point without a problem by
peeling the film on the new tape back for about 1 mm and then sticking it back down.
New tape
1 mm NXTSPL007
Note: Do not peel too far back or parts may be lost.
6. Put a splicing chip in the splicing tool.
Splicing chip NXTSPL002a
7. Place the existing and new carrier tape onto the splicing tool with the cover tape at the
top.
a. Ensure that the end of the existing carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and
then secure it with the holding clip so that it does not move.
b. Ensure that the start of the new carrier tape is at the middle of the splicing tool and
then secure it with the holding clip so that it does not move.
Holding clips
New tape
Existing tape
NXTSPL003a

8. Squeeze the grips for the splicing tool quickly to set the splicing chip.
Handle
NXTSPL004
Note: When squeezing the grips, keep fingers and other body parts away from the splicing area
to avoid injury.
9. Secure the joined carrier tape using the splicing cover tape.
Splicing cover tape
30SYS-0137E
Note: Be sure to use the correct size for the top film tape based on the width of the tape being
spliced.
10.Gently peel the top blue section of the top film splicing tape off the spliced tape. A yellow
band of tape should remain on the spliced tape.
30SYS-0136E
11.Move the holding levers on the splicing tool so the tape can be removed and gently
remove the spliced tape from the splicing tool.

12.Gently wind up any old length of tape onto the new reel and set the reel on the feeder
reel holder.
30SYS-0138E
13.If using Fujitrax, tap the displayed message at Kit Handy to inform Fujitrax that splicing
has been completed.
This completes the splicing procedure.
When using the splicing jigs shown below, refer to the “Fuji Intelligent Feeder Splicing
Metal Detection Unit Instruction Manual” for details.
AA9DA01 AA94Z02 AA95A02
AA94T02
01SYS-0353E
Caution regarding splicing carrier tape

Splicing is a procedure that should only be performed when the number of remaining parts
in the carrier is very small. If splicing is performed when there are still lots of parts left in
the carrier tape, then the diameter of the tape roll may exceed the diameter of the parts reel
when the carrier tape is taken up.
Carrier Tape Carrier Tape
Parts reel Parts reel 01SYS-0332E
If the reel is set in the reel holder with the carrier tape in this condition then the tape may
interfere with the feeder, and the loose tape may get twisted as it is moved forwards,
causing indexing problems.
Ensure that the diameter of the tape roll does not exceed the diameter of the parts reel.

Caution when using the free allocation function

When the free allocation function is being used, both the slot at which the feeder is actually
set and the slot specified in the job are displayed at the parts out warning screen in Kit
Handy. Perform splicing for the feeder displayed in the [Position] column.
Slot with parts out condition
01SYS-0188E
In the screen shown above, the feeder for which a parts out warning occurred is set at 1-1-
20-0. However, slot 1-1-11-0 is specified in the job.

5.4.2 Replacing feeders

The following screen displays when parts run out during production.
It is possible to switch the display between the feeder setup guidance and the feeder
allocation list by pressing [OK].
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
embossed tape
Device comment
Feeder setup guidance
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Pitch
Width
embossed tape
Device comment
Feeder allocation list 30SYS-0139aE
The feeder setup guidance screen displays the feeders which are required for changeover.
The feeder allocation list screen displays the slots at which feeders need to be set. The
screen can be changed to display information for all feeders by pushing the up and down
arrow keys.
Note: Follow the procedures displayed on the guidance screen to perform feeder changeover. It
is also possible to perform feeder changeover during production. Procedures for loading
and unloading tape feeders are shown in this section. The same procedures can be used
for stick feeders.
Procedures differ depending on whether or not Fujitrax Verifier is used. When not using
Fujitrax Verifier, check the parts out on the operation panel and then exchange the feeder.
Verifying (when using Fujitrax Verifier)

1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
screen in Kit Manager, or the parts status screen in Kit Handy.

2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being
placed. Set the new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick
verification. (The machine will check the parts type once the feeder has been inserted
into the device pallet).
Note: When using AVL data, be sure to create an ID if the new parts have a different part number
than the current parts.
Removing feeders
1. Verify that a parts out condition is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
2. Remove the feeder which has run out of parts. Refer to "3.9 Removing Feeders from the
Feeder Pallet" for details on removing feeders.
30SYS-0142
Setting feeders
1. Set the feeder with new parts into the slot. Refer to "3.8 Setting Feeders on Feeder
Pallets" for details on setting feeders.
30SYS-0143E

After the feeder has been set and the set button has been pushed, information for the
feeder is displayed at the feeder set guidance screen. If the set button is pushed again,
information for the feeder is cleared.
Set information
Stage number
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Tape width
[8]: 8 mm width paper
or embossed tape
Device comment 30SYS-0149E

5.4.3 Replacing feeders (Tray unit-LT)

The following feeder exchange guidance displays when parts run out during production
when using feeders set on the tray unit-LT to supply parts.
Slot information
Stage number
Slot number
Feeder name
Pitch
Width
Device comment
The feeder slot positions
on the tray unit-LT
are slot 39 to 45.
30SYS-0150aE
The method for setting feeders is the same as setting on feeder pallets. Correctly insert the
feeders into the feeder slots for the tray unit-LT.
Guidance displayed on a module with a tray unit-LT

On a module with a tray unit-LT, if parts run out for feeders and trays at the same time, the
guidance for supplying tray parts is displayed first.
When tray parts replenishment is completed or if the left arrow button is pushed, the
guidance for supplying feeder parts is displayed.
Tray parts supply guidance
Replenishment for both magazines

completed or left arrow button pushed. 30SYS-0151E
If trays replenishment is completed for one magazine and production can be continued, a
pictogram to indicate that feeder replenishment should be performed first is displayed.
Push the left arrow button to display the feeder replenishment guidance.
Guidance pictogram to supply feeder parts first Feeder set guidance
Push the left arrow button. 30SYS-0152E

5.4.4 Using dynamic alternate feeders

Production can be continued by using the dynamic alternate feeder function. During
production, a report is issued by Fujitrax Verifier that a part is going to run out. The operator
prepares a feeder with the same part and places this feeder in an empty position in the
module. Fujitrax Verifier checks the set feeder and changes that feeder position into an
alternate feeder for the matching part. Once the original feeder runs out of parts, the
alternate feeder is then used by the machine.
Note: In order to use the dynamic alternate feeder function, Fujitrax Verifier must be used.
Two different modes can be selected when using dynamic alternate devices. Settings for
the modes are specified in Fujitrax.
Setting Description
Look For Removable The alternate feeder can be used when a condition such as
a parts out warning occurs for the feeder currently being
used in production, or when a problem occurs during parts
pick up.
Keep Alt Feeder The alternate feeder can be use regardless of the condition
of the feeder currently being used for production.
Replacing feeders
1. Verify that a parts out warning is displayed at the machine operation panel, the status
2. Prepare a parts reel containing the same parts as the parts that are currently being
placed. Set the new parts reel in a feeder.
3. Use Kit Manager to create an ID, or use Kit Manager or Kit Handy to perform quick
verification. (The machine will check the parts type once the feeder has been inserted
into the device pallet).
Note: Create a different ID if the new parts have a different part number than the current parts.
4. Set an alternate feeder for which verification has been performed into an empty slot on
the device pallet.
5. Check the feeder set LED for that position. If it turns green, verification was completed
successfully and the feeder status is changed into an alternate feeder.
6. Once the original feeder runs out of parts, remove that feeder and the machine starts to
use the alternate feeder. After the original feeder is removed, the LED for the alternate
feeder changes to red and the feeder must be removed (it becomes a “removeable
feeder”).
Note: If multiple dynamic alternate feeders are set for the same part, the status of all of the set
feeders becomes “removeable”.
From this point, procedures differ according to the mode selected for dynamic alternate
devices.

When [Look For Removable] is selected

1. The guidance area changes to display the guidance for moving the alternate feeder to
the original feeder position. Remove the alternate feeder. At this point the original slot
red LED will begin to blink.
30SYS-0153E
Caution: When there are multiple alternate feeders, only remove one of the alternate feeders. If two
or more feeders are removed, the feeder guidance will not display correctly.
2. Set the removed alternate feeder in the original feeder position. The feeder set LED
turns green if verification is OK and production can continue.
Note: When removing the alternate feeder (removable feeder) and setting in the slot for the
original feeder, make sure to perform this within the [Miss Prevention Timer] time limit set
at the Central Server.
If the action is not completed within this time limit, the feeder status becomes "No ID" and
the feeder must be verified again before it can be used.
When [Keep Alt Feeder] is selected

1. Parts pick up is performed using the alternate feeder until a new feeder is set into the
original slot.
2. Once a new feeder is set into the original slot, parts pick up is continued from that feeder.

5.4.5 Exchanging feeders when using the free allocation function

When using the free feeder allocation function, production is possible even after setting a
feeder in a slot other than the one specified in the job.
Note: Fujitrax Verifier is necessary to use the free feeder allocation function.
The feeder exchange guidance displayed at the machine operation panel is the same as
when the free allocation function is not being used. For details, refer to "5.4.2 Replacing
feeders".
01SYS-0190E
The screen shown above indicates that a part outs condition has occurred for the feeder
set in slot 11. This is not the feeder for slot 11 which is specified in the job.
The feeder exchange guidance which is displayed at Kit Handy and Kit Manager shows
both the actual slot at which the feeder is set and the slot which is specified in the job.
Slot with parts out condition
1-1-1-0 1-1-2-0
Slot number
01SYS-0189E
The screen shown above indicates that a parts out condition has occurred for the feeder
set in slot 1. This feeder is specified for slot 2 in the job.
Exchanging feeders
1. Set a new reel of the same parts that are being used in production on a different feeder.
2. Use KIT Manager or KIT Handy to verify the parts. (The machine will check the parts
type once the feeder has been set on the feeder pallet.)
3. Remove the feeder for which the parts out condition occurred from the feeder pallet.
4. Set the new verified feeder onto the feeder pallet. The feeder can be set in any slot as
long as it is on the same module.
5. Ensure that the green LED is lit on the feeder control panel.

5.5 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-LT

There are four main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-LT.
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Using tray
verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the magazine on which parts have run out. (Not using
tray verification)
• Supplying trays parts to the supply magazine (magazine A or magazine B).
• Supply during production using dynamic alternate trays
No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance
displayed on the operation panel.
Note: For cautions when inserting trays into magazines, refer to "4.6.5 Caution when inserting
trays into the Tray unit-LT".
5.5.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Refer to the tray parts supply guidance screen.
Operation guidance
Slot
Device information
Operation guidance

Set tray parts (not available when using Verifier) 30SYS-0154E

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then use the
following procedure.

Front door
Front door
30SYS-0155E
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0156E
CAUTION

01SYS-0719

Kit Handy
30SYS-0157E
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID. If tray
verification with position check is being used, scan the FIDL (tray drawer) and the
DID (tray).
Note: For details on tray verification, refer to “5. Verifying Tray Parts” in the Fujitrax Verifier User
Manual.
2. The first pickup position for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y
coordinates in Kit Handy. Refer to "4.6.4 Setting the pickup position" for details.

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2

Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0158E
Note: It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as
all the trays necessary for production have been set. When this condition is fulfilled,
guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0729

Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0160E
30SYS-0161
7. If you are using tray verification with position check, the machine reads the FIDL of the
tray drawer. If the wrong part type is loaded or if parts are not set in the tray cavities
correctly, tray set guidance redisplays. If this occurs, reset the tray.

5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Refer to the parts supply guidance screen.
Operation guidance
Slot

Device information
Operation guidance
Specifying the pickup point

Setting tray parts
Setting feeder parts 30SYS-0162E


Front door
Front door
30SYS-0155E
the LED for the slot that is selected in the supply guidance screen is lit.
LED 01SYS-0246
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0156E
CAUTION

01SYS-0719

Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
Tray drawer
01SYS-0239
3. If it is necessary to specify the first pickup point, then specify it at this time. Refer to
"4.6.4 Setting the pickup position" for details.

Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0776
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0158E
Note: It is possible to enter production even though not all of the trays have been set as long as
all the trays necessary for production have been set. When this condition is fulfilled,
guidance for pushing COMPLETE is displayed as shown below.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0729
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0160E

8. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is started.
30SYS-0161

5.5.3 Guidance display and procedure (when supplying parts to

supply magazine)
The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine B (the lower
magazine) as the supply magazine.
The procedures are the same when using magazine A (the upper magazine) as the supply
magazine. For magazine A, use the following procedures but just change the supply
position to the upper section (open the upper door).
Operation guidance
Slot
Slots 10 to 12 do not display.
* When using parts with a height of 25.4 mm or more, slots from 1 to 8 are displayed.
Slots from 9 to 12 are not displayed because four empty slots are required.
Slot 12 in magazine B is the location to which the drawer with the empty tray is moved.
When this slot is selected, the background color changes to yellow.
Supply trays to the slots designated by the red mark.
Original device Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate device
Device information
The device comment, pickup direction and starting pickup point (1,1) are displayed for
the currently selected slot.
Operation guidance
Setting tray parts
Specifying the
pickup point 30SYS-0163E


1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT for the lower magazine.
30SYS-0164
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0732E
CAUTION
3. Remove the tray drawer from slot 12.
30SYS-0733

1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0789

1. Check the slot to be supplied. The LED for the slot that requires parts is lit. In addition,
LED
01SYS-0320
Tray Tray drawer
Subslot 1
01SYS-0238
Subslot 2
01SYS-0321

4. If it is necessary to specify the tray pick up point, set it here. For more details, refer to
"4.6.4 Setting the pickup position".
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0776
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0734E
7. Close the bottom front door and then push the COMPLETE button.
30SYS-0730
Note: Close the door gently so as to not jar the tray unit-LTW.

5.5.4 Guidance display and procedure (for dynamic alternate tray

resupply)
The following are the procedures for supplying parts when using magazine A (the upper
magazine) as the supply magazine.
The procedures are the same when using magazine B (the lower magazine) as the supply
magazine. For magazine B, use the following procedures but just change the supply
position to the lower section (open the lower door).
Operation guidance
1 2
Slot
"S" indicates the supply magazine. This is the display when magazine A is specified as the supply
magazine.
Push the up and down arrow keys to select the slot. The background color of the selected slot changes
to green.
The upper slot(s) in magazine A are the location to which drawers with empty trays are moved. The
number of slots used for storing empty trays should be enough to hold the tray in the production magazine
that occupies the largest number of slots.
Slots with a red mark require trays to be supplied. Trays can be set in any slot in the supply magazine
(except for the slots used for storing empty trays).
Original tray Position from which pickup is currently being performed
Alternate tray Alternate tray (already set)
Device information
The slot number for the currently selected slot is displayed.
The device comment and pickup direction for the currently selected slot are displayed.
Operation guidance

Set first pickup position

Set feeder parts Set tray parts 30SYS-0839

Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the
procedure below.
Remove tray drawers

1. Open the front door on the tray unit-LT. Open the upper level door.
Front door
Front door
30SYS-0155E
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0156E
Caution
3. Remove the tray drawers from the removal slot.
Empty tray
Drawer
01SYS-0495E


Kit Handy
30SYS-0157E
a. Check the part to be supplied at Kit Handy or Kit Manager.
b. Scan the FIDL (drawer) and DID (tray) using Kit Handy or a handy scanner.
Note: For details on verifying trays refer to section “5. Tray Verify Operation” in the Fujitrax Verifier
User Manual.
Note: When supplying parts on a drawer in which only one subslot is being used, scan the "-
NOPARTS-" barcode attached to the drawer for the subslot without parts.
2. The first pickup position for the tray parts can be specified by entering the X, Y
coordinates in Kit Handy. Refer to "4.6.4 Setting the pickup position" for details.

1. Set the tray(s) in the proper subslot in the drawer.
Drawer
Subslot 1
Tray
Subslot 2 01SYS-0496E
2. Gently set the tray drawer in an empty slot.
Drawer
01SYS-0497E
Note: The tray drawer cannot be set in the slot(s) for storing empty drawers. If a tray drawer is set
in the slot(s) for storing empty trays, guidance to remove the drawer displays.

Note: Tray drawers can be set in any empty slot except for the slot(s) used for storing empty trays.
The most efficient way when using the dynamic alternate tray function is to set the tray
drawers for parts that are due to run out first in the empty slot nearest the top of the unit.
A A Removal If parts outs occur in the order A, B, C, set

Removal trays in open slots in order starting from the
B
A A uppermost slot.
C
B
C
Production Supply
magazine magazine 01SYS-0506E
3. Check the warnings for magazines to be removed given at Kit Handy or Kit Manager. If
more trays need to be set, repeat the steps performed up to this point to verify the other
parts.
Drawer
stopper
Knob
30SYS-0160E
30SYS-0840

Supplying tray parts in advance

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, parts for the next tray due to run out can
also be supplied when supplying parts for the current tray.
When using Kit Handy

1. Display either the [Parts Status List] or [Device Check] window.
2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray
parts need to be supplied.
Note: The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).
01SYS-0502E
3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.
4. Tap the refresh display button in Kit Handy to update the [Mag. Time Left] information.
01SYS-0503J
Note: Refer to "3. Operating Kit Handy" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for more details on
using Kit Handy.
When using Kit Manager

1. Open the device window in Kit Manager.
2. Check the [Mag. Time Left] column. This displays the time remaining until the next tray
parts need to be supplied.
Note: The sort function can be used to change the order (either descending or ascending).
01SYS-0504E
3. Verify the relevant parts and then set the tray drawer in an empty slot.
Note: Refer to "2. Operating Kit Manager" in the Fujitrax Verifier User Manual for more details on
using Kit Manager.

Guidance for removing tray drawers when supplying tray parts

When using the dynamic alternate tray function, tray parts can be set in any empty slot in
the supply magazine.
However, guidance to remove tray drawers displays in the following situations. Remove the
tray drawers as prompted to by the guidance and insert them in another slot.
a. A set tray is too tall and protrudes into the slot(s) for storing empty trays
1 2
30SYS-0841
• The machine checks the height of trays after COMPLETE is pushed. If the
height of a tray set immediately below the slot(s) used for storing empty trays is
detected to be protruding into the slot(s) used for storing empty trays, guidance
to remove the tray drawer displays.
b. A tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays
1 2
30SYS-0842
• If a tray is set in the slot(s) for storing empty trays, the status does not become
"Set OK", and guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.
c. A tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray
1 2
30SYS-0843
• If a tray is set in a slot specified to be used by another tray (or if not enough slots
are left for a certain tray part), the status does not become "Set OK", and
guidance to remove the tray drawer displays.

5.5.5 When using the supply reservation function

Parts supply for the tray unit-LT can be performed efficiently by following the guidance
displayed at the operation panel. However, even if guidance to supply tray parts is not
being displayed at the operation panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray parts by
pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function should be used in cases like the one shown below.
• If it is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator
wishes to perform part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a
parts out condition from occurring while he/she is gone.
Enable operation at the side at which parts supply is to be performed and then follow the
procedure below.
1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The
SUPPLY PARTS button will begin to flash.
SUPPLY PARTS button

(upper level)
SUPPLY PARTS button

(lower level) 30SYS-0414E
2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The
magazine of the tray unit-LT will retract so that parts supply is possible.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0415
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. Refer to "5.5.1 Guidance display and
procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier)" or "5.5.2 Guidance display and procedure
(when not using Fujitrax Verifier)" for how to set trays.

5.6 Replenishing Trays on a Tray Unit-M

There are two main methods for supplying parts for a tray unit-M.
• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Using tray
verification)
• Supplying tray parts to the slots at which parts have run out. (Not using tray
verification)
No matter the mode being used, supply tray parts based on the tray supply guidance
displayed on the operation panel.
Note: For cautions when inserting trays into magazines, refer to "4.7.4 Cautions when inserting
trays into the Tray unit-M".
5.6.1 Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance


Set tray parts (not available when using Verifier)

Removing trays
1. Open the front door on tray unit-M.
Front door
30SYS-0174E
Tray stopper
30SYS-0175E
3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.
30SYS-0721


Kit Handy
30SYS-0157E
b. Use Kit Handy or the handy scanner to scan the part barcode or the DID.
Note: For details on verifying trays refer to "5. Tray Verify Operation" in the Fujitrax Verifier User
Manual.
2. After scanning the part barcode or the DID, the first pickup position for the tray parts can
be specified by entering the X, Y coordinates in Kit Handy. For details, refer to "4.7.3
Setting the pickup position" in this manual.

1. Set the tray in the correct slot by referring to the guidance displayed at the machine
operation panel.
30SYS-0176E
Caution: Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also,
ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray
contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.

a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the
empty trays of other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but
replenishment is not required.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0177a
Tray stopper
30SYS-0178E

5. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
30SYS-0179E

5.6.2 Guidance display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax

Verifier)
Operation guidance
Slot
Alternate device
Device information
Operation guidance

Specify pickup position

Set tray parts

Removing trays
1. Open the front door on tray unit-M.
Front door
30SYS-0174E
Tray stopper
30SYS-0175E
3. Remove the empty tray from the slot to be supplied with parts.
30SYS-0721


1. Check the slot indicated in the guidance and then remove the empty tray and gently set
a new tray with the same part number back in the slot from which the empty tray was
removed.
30SYS-0176E
Caution: Gently set the tray into the magagine to prevent any parts from becoming dislodged. Also,
ensure that the tray does not contact the stopper located in the rear of the slot. If the tray
contacts the stopper, pull the tray slightly forward.
2. If necessary, specify settings for tray pickup position. Refer to "4.7.3 Setting the pickup
position" for details.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0790
a. When replenishing the part that caused production to be stopped, also replace the
empty trays of other parts.
Slot Part Present/Parts out Example

Production has stopped because a recovery up error
01 X - Parts out -
has occurred for part Z. Although a sufficient
02 X - Parts out -
supply of parts X and Y exist in alternate trays,
03 X Present
the parts that are out should nonetheless be
04 X Present replenished in order to enable continuous operation
05 Y Present after production is restarted.
06 Y - Parts out -
07 Z - Parts out -
08 Z - Parts out -
09 Z - Parts out -
10 NXTMTU098E
b. Remove the empty trays from positions in which parts have run out but
replenishment is not required.

Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0177a
Tray stopper
30SYS-0178E
7. Gently close the front door and push COMPLETE. Production is continued.
30SYS-0179E

5.6.3 When parts run out for both position A and position B
A
B
30SYS-0791
When two tray unit-Ms are in a module, production is stopped when parts have run out for
position A and position B and these are waiting for replenishment parts. If this occurs,
follow the procedures below.
Position A Waiting Position B Waiting

Slot Part Present/Parts out Slot Part Present/Parts out
01 X - Parts out - 01 X Present
02 Y Present 02 Y - Parts out -
03 03
NXTMTU099E
1. Parts replenishment guidance for the first parts is shown in the operation panel.
Resupply the parts according to the displayed guidance.
Note: Replenishment is not completed just by removing the empty tray and then pushing OK.
2. Production is resumed once parts for the first tray unit have been replenished, and a
single side is still waiting for parts to be replenished.
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X Present
03 03 NXTMTU100E
Note: in the example diagram above the parts "X" were the first parts that needed to be
replenished.
3. Guidance for replenishing parts for the other side is displayed in the operation panel.
Resupply parts according to the displayed guidance. Once all of the parts for the other
side have been replenished, parts replenishment for both positions is completed.
If the operator wishes to continue production with the current parts for a reason such as
production for the current job is nearly completed, then move the parts from the tray unit-M
position that was not the first to require replenishment (position B in the example) into the
tray unit-M position that was first (position A in the example).
Position A Position B Waiting

01 X Present 01 X - Parts out -
03 03
NXTMTU101E
After setting the trays, specify the pickup point for the moved tray and then push OK. For
details, refer to "4.7.3 Setting the pickup position" in this manual.

5.6.4 Using the SUPPLY button

Parts supply for the tray unit-M can be performed efficiently by following the guidance
displayed at the operation panel of the machine. However, even if guidance to supply tray
parts is not being displayed at the operation panel, it is possible to efficiently supply tray
parts by pushing SUPPLY PARTS. This function should be used in cases like the one
shown below.
• It is necessary for the operator to leave the machine for a while, so the operator
wishes to perform part supply for the alternate tray now in order to prevent a
parts out condition from occurring while he/she is gone.
1. When the machine is performing automatic operation, push SUPPLY PARTS. The
SUPPLY PARTS button will begin to blink.
SUPPLY PARTS button
30SYS-0183E
2. Guidance for supplying tray parts will be displayed at the machine operation panel. The
magazine of the tray unit-M will retract so that parts supply is possible.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0184E
3. Open the front door and supply tray parts. For details on setting tray parts, refer to "5.6.1
Guidance display and procedure (when using Fujitrax Verifier)" or "5.6.2 Guidance
display and procedure (when not using Fujitrax Verifier)" in this manual.
30SYS-0179E

5.7 Clearing Errors

The error screen displays upon the occurrence of an error.
Cause of the error Error code Information
Procedures for
clearing the error
This screen is an example of error guidance.
Cause of the error
A pictogram representing the cause of the error or the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
In the example shown above, air leakage is the cause of the error.
Error code
This code represents the cause of the error. More detailed information about the error can be
obtained by using Accessory Software to search for this error code.
Information
Information such as the status of the I/O at the place where the error occurred and the name
of the unit at which the error occurred is displayed.
30SYS-0185E
1. Refer to the displayed pictograms and then clear the cause of the error.
Note: Contact a member of the maintenance staff or technical engineer and ask them to fix the
error.
2. Push READY ON to proceed with production, if necessary.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0792

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 6. Machine Operations
6. Machine Operations
This section explains the procedures for various machine operations.
6.1 Blocking Feeders

If a feeder needs maintenance during production when using Fujitrax Verifier, that feeder
will stop being used and guidance for exchanging the feeder displays on the operation
panel. By using this function, it is possible to reduce the number of feeder related errors.
In addition, a feeder which has not had maintenance performed cannot be used in
production even if verification of that feeder is performed.
Note: The Fujitrax option software, Advanced Feeder Maintenance, must be installed and used
in order to use this function.
6.1.1 Feeder exchange guidance displayed

If a feeder exceeds any of the conditions specified in the [Conditions] tab for the Advanced
Maintenance [Options] dialog box during production, then that feeder will stop being used
by the machine and guidance for exchanging the feeder is displayed.
30SYS-0190J
6.1.2 Replacing feeders

Exchange the feeder or remove the feeder, perform maintenance on it and then set it back
in the module.
30SYS-0142

6. Machine Operations SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
6.2 Automatic Backup Pin Function

This function uses a picker mounted in the placing head to pick up automatic backup pins
from the stocker and place them on the backup plate.
Picker NXTPHD043E
Note: For twin robot machines, if a head with a picker is set on the front or rear robot, the
automatic backup pin allocation function can be used.
In addition, it is recommended to use the panel position correction function with this
function.
6.2.1 Using automatic backup pins

1. Set the backup pins in the stocker.
a. Remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit) using manual commands.
b. Open the door for that module side.
c. Set the backup pins in the stocker.
Stocker
Backup pins
01SYS-0280E
2. Close the front door and attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
3. Push START and the machine automatically positions the automatic backup pins.
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0128

6.2.2 Errors during operation

Check the following items for how to clear errors that occur when using automatic backup
pins.
When backup pins cannot be located or it is not possible to return

them.
This error occurs when events such as the ones listed below occur.
• When pickup pins are returned to the stocker by hand.
• When backup pins cannot be found during position checks.
• When the number of backup pins specified in the module configuration is

changed to a number less than the actual number of backup pins that are
placed.
30SYS-0194E
a. Push OK and then remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
c. Return all backup pins on the backup plate to the stocker by hand.
Caution: If the error guidance is cleared without removing the backup pins from the backup plate,
interference may occur between the already placed backup pins and the new backup pins
when operation is restarted.
d. Push OK and then close the front door.
e. Attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
When the picker remains closed

The error occurs when the picker remains closed when trying to pick a backup pin with the
picker.
30SYS-0195J

c. Push up on the picker by hand to open it.
When there are not enough backup pins

In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins in the stocker, the marks on
the automatic backup pins in the stocker are read. The following displays when errors occur
during the reading of the backup pin marks for backup pins in the stocker.
30SYS-0193E
c. Set the backup pins back in the stocker.
Error reading the backup pins in the stocker

In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins in the stocker, the marks on
the automatic backup pins in the stocker are read. When the marks on the pins are read,
an error occurs due to a problem reading a mark.
30SYS-0197E
a. Push READY ON.

Note: It is possible to push MONITOR to check the image.

When looking from side 1, the first pin on

the left in the stocker is "Pin No. 1".
When the read result is red, the value

has exceeded the permissible value.
30SYS-0198E
b. Push OK and then remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
c. Open the door for that module side.
d. Check the following items.
• Whether the stocker is installed correctly
• Whether there are any problems with the backup pins shown at the operation
panel
e. Push OK and then close the front door.
f. Attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
Error reading backup pins marks for backup pins on the backup plate
In order to check for the presence or absence of backup pins on the backup plate, the marks
on the automatic backup pins on the backup plate are read. The following displays when
errors occur during the reading of the backup pin marks for backup pins on the backup
plate.
30SYS-0199E
a. Push READY ON.


When looking from side 1, the first pin on

the left in the stocker is "Pin No. 1".
When the read result is red, the value

has exceeded the permissible value.
30SYS-0200E
d. Ensure that there are no problems with the condition of the pins and there are no
foreign items on the bottom of the pins before returning them to the stocker by hand.
Error reading the stocker 2D code

The following displays when errors occur during the reading of the 2D code for the stocker
if the 2D code is dirty.
30SYS-0201E
a. Push READY ON.

30SYS-0202E

d. Check the 2D mark and remove any foreign items if there are any. Also, check that
the 2D mark is not in the wrong position.
Picker raising and lowering errors

When the machine starts, the picker moves to the upper position. Also, when backup pins
are grabbed, the picker moves up and down. Errors occur if these operations do not occur
properly.
30SYS-0196E
c. Check that the sensor is functioning correctly.
d. Move the picker to the upper limit or push up on the picker by hand.
Picker upper limit errors

The machine monitors the upper limit of the picker in case it drops. Errors occur if for some
reason a problem is detected with the upper limit.
30SYS-0203E
First, confirm the status of the [PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK] on the error screen.
The next actions depend on whether it is [ON] or [OFF].

If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [ON]

c. It is possible that the sensor is temporarily off. Confirm the status of the I/O input.
• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
• Check that the sensor board connectors are connected correctly and that no
pins are disconnected.
d. Turn the machine main switch off.
e. Remove the head and check the following.
• The up and down movement of the picker is smooth.
• The picker moves up to the position where the upper limit sensor is supposed to
detect it.
f. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
again and continue production. If an error recurs, replace the head.
If the X100 PIN CLAMPER UPPER LIMIT CHECK is [OFF]

Push OK and then remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit). Visually check the position of the
picker. The method to resolve this problem is different depending on whether the picker is
at the upper limit or not.
- If the picker is not in the upper position
a. The picker may have dropped or fallen off for some reason. Check the following.
• The picker has not dropped or become deformed.
• The cylinder is down.
• The picker has not collided with the panel or other item.
b. After confirming that the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is off, push the picker to confirm
that it will raise.
Note: If the Y100 CLAMPER DOWN is on, acquire trace data.
c. Turn the machine main switch off.
d. Remove the head and check the following.
detect it.
e. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
- If the picker is in the upper position
a. It is necessary to check the status of the pin clamper upper limit sensor.

• Check the position of the sensor and the dog.
detect it.
b. Turn the machine main switch off.
c. Remove the head and check the following.
detect it.
d. If there are no problems with the head or the picker, set the head in the machine
Clearing picker upper limit errors from Accessory Software

When error guidance for the picker at the upper limit is displayed, the error cannot be
cleared by pushing READY ON unless the feeder pallet (or tray unit) is removed.
When it is difficult to remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit) due to the status of the machine,
a function is available in Accessory Software to forcibly clear the picker upper limit error.
Refer to "9.6.6Forcibly clearing errors" for details on how to clear picker upper limit errors
from Accessory Software.
6.2.3 Important points

1. When dual lane production is being performed and a panel exists in only one lane (either
lane 1 or lane 2), the backup pin cannot be positioned or returned at the lane without a
panel. It is necessary to remove panels from both lanes before positioning or returning
backup pins.
2. When the panel position correction function is being used, do not position backup pins
at the panel edge detection area when creating the job.
3. When using felt paper, do not position backup pins on the felt paper when creating the
job.
4. If operation is started with a panel inside the module, backup pins are not allocated.
Remove the panel from inside the module before starting operation.

6.3 Panel Position Correction Function

This function is effective when using panels for which the stopping position may be unstable
due to the weight or shape of the panel.
6.3.1 Attaching felt paper plate

The underside of the felt paper is magnetic, allowing it to be mounted onto the backup plate.
While attaching the felt paper plate pay particular attention to positioning.
(X-direction)
Type A 20 mm 274 mm
*1 Backup plate
*1 Push the felt paper plate up against the side surface of the backup plate.
The applicable panel size is below.
L = 48 to 534 mm
Type B 30 mm 60 mm
Backup plate
The felt paper can be placed anywhere on the surface of the backup plate.
30SYS-0369E
(Y-direction)
When the Y-coordinates are at the default value (12 mm) during vision processing, the
position of the felt paper in the Y-direction is displayed below.
Lane 2 Lane 1
12.5 mm 1.0 mm
01SYS-0358E
For lane 2, attach the felt paper so that it does not obstruct the light beam of the backup pin
detection sensor. The red lamp on the receiving sensor will light up if the light beam is
obstructed.
6.3.2 Regarding errors when using the panel position correction

function
Follow the procedures below when an error occurs for the panel position correction
function.

Unable to acquire fiducial mark

This error occurs when the machine fails to capture an image of the panel edge or fiducial
mark.
30SYS-0218E
c. Remove the panel. When correcting using the panel edge, clean the backup plate
and low reflective plates.
Push MONITOR and check the image displayed. If the contrast between the panel and the
felt paper (background) is small, then modify the following and try again.
a. Change the contrast between the light and dark sections.
b. Narrow the scan area specified in the job.
Panel Background Panel Background
When the scan area is within the dotted

lines, the panel edge cannot be detected
because there is low contrast between
the upper and lower areas.
NXTOPE239E
Panel unload error

This error occurs when the machine cannot unload the panel when correcting the stopping
position based on the panel edge. When this happens, background registration can also not
be performed.
30SYS-0372E

c. Remove the panel.
When panel stopping position correction cannot correct the stopping

position.
When the panel edge position exceeds +/- 0.5 mm from the correct position after the panel
stopping position function has tried to correct the position two times, the machine stops with
an error. Follow the flowchart below to correct the issue.
A panel stopping position

error occurs.
Clean the conveyor belt and/or

adjust the conveyor belt tension.
Is the panel edge displayed
clearly in the image?
Yes
Specify the retry function.
No
Is some object in the background Is the bright object a backup

brightly lit? pin?
Yes
No
Is the panel edge in the Y-direction

not straight?
Yes Yes
Change the coordinates for the Change the coordinates for the
panel edge check position in the panel edge check position to a
Y-direction to a location that the location in which there are no
No panel edge in the Y-direction is backup pins located.
straight.
No
Acquire the image from the machine Clean the backup plate and ensure
and send it to your Fuji representative. that the felt paper is in the location
that is being checked. 30SYS-0371E


1. Do not place shiny items in the panel edge detection area.
2. Any lubricants on the surface of the backup plate will cause problems when detecting
the panel edge.
3. If low reflective plates have been attached, backup pins cannot be allocated near them.
Regions where pins cannot be allocated are shown below.
(mm)
Area where backup pins cannot be positioned
9 20 9
Felt paper plate (type A)
9
Area where backup pins cannot be positioned
9
Felt paper
30
plate (type B)
9
9 60 9 30SYS-0370E

6.4 Device Statistical Warnings and Error Stop is

Supported
This displays warnings for positions that have an error rate that exceeds a specified value.
In addition, operation is stopped if the errors exceed another specified error value.
01SYS-0261E
• Specify the desired success rate. It is possible to make settings for all lines,
individual lines, machines, modules, and slots. Refer to the Accessory Software
Operation Manual for details.
6.4.1 Device statistical warning screen

When the error rate exceeds the specified value for the statistical warning rate, a warning
is displayed on the operation panel of the module in question. Furthermore, if the error rate
drops below the success warning rate value then the warning is automatically cleared.
Example
11
Feeder in slot 11
Indicates the slot for which the warning
11
was issued.
3-2
Tray unit-LT
Slot 3 - subslot 2
B-3
Tray unit-M
Position B - slot 3 30SYS-0210aE

6.4.2 The statistical error display

When the error rate exceeds the specified statistical error rate, the machine cycle stops.
When this occurs, error information is displayed on the operation panel like that shown
below.
Information
This displays the feeder position
and error rate. 30SYS-0211E
Note: The warning is cleared when a feeder is removed and reinserted as this is interpreted as
feeder maintenance having been performed.
For the example below, check the feeder and perform actions on it to correct the issue such
as maintenance and set it back in the feeder pallet. After the error has been cleared, the
machine can restart production.

6.5 Changing Nozzles Due to Statistical Warnings

When using this function and the error rate for a nozzle exceeds a specified value then that
nozzle is skipped and not used in production. The nozzle specified to be skipped is then
scheduled to be changed for a good nozzle by the machine when panels are unloading and
loading, and production is continued.
Set the spare nozzles in the nozzle station. If there is no alternative nozzle, then the
machine stops with an error.
6.5.1 Changing nozzles due to statistical warnings

When the setting to change nozzles due to nozzle statistical warnings is enabled, the
changeover display area changes as shown in the picture below.
Nozzle changes due to statistical warnings enabled 30SYS-0213E
6.5.2 Exchanging nozzles

After production is started, the machine calculates the nozzle check conditions. If there is
a nozzle that has reached or passed the specified nozzle error count, then that nozzle is
exchanged with a spare nozzle set in the nozzle station.
When this occurs, the background color of the pictogram in the changeover display area
changes to yellow. This informs the operator that there are nozzles in the nozzle station
that require maintenance.
Background color: yellow
30SYS-0214E
If there are any remaining spare nozzles in the nozzle station, then production is continued.
If there are nozzles with errors in the nozzle station, then stop the machine and perform the
following steps.
1. Remove the nozzles by using the eject nozzles manual command.

Note: Refer to "7.7.2Ejecting nozzles" for information on removing nozzles by using manual
commands.

2. Clean the nozzles.

Note: 1. Refer to “5. Preventive Maintenance” in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference Manual for
information on cleaning nozzles.
2. The background color turns yellow for nozzles requiring maintenance for the exchanged
nozzle code in changeover guidance and nozzle nickname in the manual command
information display. When cleaning, refer to this information.
R07-013-070
R07-013-070

30SYS-0215E
3. Set the cleaned nozzles back in the nozzle station.
4. Set a nozzle station on the machine and then attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
5. Use the remote operation command [Complete nozzle maintenance] in Accessory

Software.
6. Push START to restart production.

If there are no spare nozzles set in the nozzle station for the skipped nozzle to be
exchanged with, then the machine stops and displays an error like that shown below.
Perform maintenance on the nozzles or exchange the nozzles and then restart production.
30SYS-0216E

6.6 Nozzle Changeover Error Detection Function

This function displays guidance for clearing errors that occur when problems are detected
during nozzle changeover.
When an error occurs during nozzle changeover, the head may stop in a position where it
collides with the nozzle station. The error cannot be cleared until maintenance personnel
checks inside the machine.
6.6.1 Clearing nozzle changeover errors

The guidance applies to the following errors.
Error code Contents

93F40000 Z, Q, R-axis error during nozzle changeover.
93FF0000 Nozzle station shutter open/close timeout
8F540000 After returning the nozzle, it remained on the head.
8F590000 After picking up the nozzle, no nozzle was detected.
6.6.2 Clearing errors when using H01 and H02(F) heads
30SYS-0221E
1. Push OK and then remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
3. Check the contents and countermeasure for the error in Accessory Software and
perform the necessary actions.
4. Confirm that no nozzles fell inside the machine. If any nozzles fell, remove the nozzle
station and set them in it.
5. Push OK and then close the front door.
6. Attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).

6.6.3 Clearing errors when using H04, H08M(Q), H12HS(Q) and V12
heads
30SYS-0222E
Note: The guidance is the same for OF head.
1. Push OK and then remove the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
3. Check the contents and countermeasure for the error in Accessory Software and
perform the necessary actions.
4. Check the Z-axis of the head. If the Z-axis is down, raise it by hand.
5. Remove the nozzle station. If any nozzles fell, set them in the nozzle station.
6. Set the nozzle station.
7. Push OK and then close the front door.
8. Attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
6.6.4 Clearing nozzle changeover errors in Accessory Software

When error guidance for nozzle exchange is displayed, the error cannot be cleared by
pushing READY ON unless the feeder pallet (or tray unit) is removed.
a function is available in Accessory Software to forcibly clear the nozzle exchange error.
Refer to "9.6.6 Forcibly clearing errors" for details on how to clear picker upper limit errors
from Accessory Software.

1. Upon restarting the machine, [A nozzle that cannot be returned to the nozzle station is
mounted on the holder] or [Dropped nozzle error] errors may occur.
2. If power to the machine is turned off while nozzle changeover error guidance is being
displayed, after the machine is restarted, be sure to inspect inside the machine and
confirm that the head and nozzle station will not collide.

6.7 Temporarily Saving Trace Data on the Machine

This allows trace data to be saved on the machine temporarily. When trouble occurs, it is
possible to reserve the trace data for the problem so it can be acquired later.
This cannot be done during production. Perform the following procedures when the main
screen, waiting for a command screen, or an error screen is displayed.
1. Push and hold the CYCLE STOP button and push the STOP button on the operation
panel of the module in question.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0217
Note: When trace data is being saved, the screen below is displayed and operations cannot be
performed on the module in question until the data is saved.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
30SYS-0219E
2. When the screen changes back from the busy screen, the trace data has been saved.
3. Acquire the trace data using Accessory Software.

Note: For details on how to acquire trace data, refer to section "4. Acquiring Machine Trace Data"
in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual (online).

6.8 Automatic Nozzle Cleaning Function

This function cleans nozzles set on the head periodically during production. It also cleans
the thermal compensation marks on the head at the same time.
This function can be used on modules loaded with the following units.
Feeder type brush unit

30SYS-0229E
Note: This function can only be used for production that uses the following heads.
H12HS H12HSQ V12
6.8.1 Using the automatic nozzle cleaning function

1. When the operating time reaches the time specified in the [Nozzle Cleaning Interval] in
Accessory Software, guidance for cleaning nozzles is displayed on the operation panel.
Cleaning nozzles
30SYS-0231E
2. If [Side1] or [Side2] listed at the nozzle cleaning guidance has a white background, a
feeder type brush unit should be set at that side. This unit can be set at any slot.
30SYS-0738

3. Nozzle cleaning begins. When the background for [Side1] or [Side2] is blue, the nozzles
are being cleaned at that side. Do not remove the feeder type brush unit when the
nozzles are being cleaned.
Background color: Blue
30SYS-0255E
4. When cleaning is completed, the machine restarts production and the cleaning nozzles
pictogram is no longer displayed.

Do not set a feeder type brush unit at the following slots when using a V12 head.
a. Single robot machines
Side 1: slots 1 and 2 Side 2: slots 44 and 45
b. Twin robot machines
Side 1: slots 44 and 45 Side 2: slots 44 and 45
Nozzle cleaning is not performed if the feeder type brush unit is set at any of these slots. In
this case, the nozzle cleaning guidance displays red.

6.9 Automatic Changeover Function

The automatic changeover function is a system to aid changeovers when performing high-
mix, low-volume production. The job is changed based on the panel type that is conveyed
into the machine.
Job B Job A
C B B B A A A A
Job C Job B Job A
C C B B B A A A
The job changes from previous module in the direction of panel flow.
30SYS-0387E
There are two modes for the automatic changeover function. Select one to be used during
operation.
• Barcode ID mode
• Handy scanner mode
For details on using the automatic changeover function, refer to the Accessory Software
Operation Manual (Chapter 4, "Automatic Changeover Function").
The following options are required in order to use the automatic changeover function.
• Automatic changeover function software (license required)
• Fujitrax: Fujitrax Verifier and Fujitrax Profiler

6.9.1 Barcode ID mode

The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the
job matching the barcode ID before beginning production.
The following equipment is required to operate using barcode ID mode.
• Conveyor • Barcode reader
• Profiler FLP (CONTEC SB20) • Panel conveyance control box (FLP-C)
Procedure
1. Push START to start production.
2. When panels are loaded, if a new job is specified by a barcode ID, panels being
produced start to be unloaded and the job is changed automatically.
3. If a changeover operation such as exchanging the head is required, guidance for the
operator is displayed at the operation panel of the machine. Follow the displayed
guidance and perform the necessary changeover work.
6.9.2 Handy scanner mode

In this mode, a handy scanner is used to scan a barcode on a production command
document in order to change jobs and start production.
The following items are required in order to use handy scanner mode.
• Barcode reader (connected to a computer)
• Barcodes that specify the desired jobs (production command document)
Procedure
1. Push START to start production.
2. Read the barcode for the next job when production of the final panel for the current job
begins.
Note: Refer to chapter 4, "4.5.5 Changeover by scanning the barcode ID" in the Accessory
Software Operation Manual.
3. The panel for the current job is completed and unloaded to the next module. Automatic
changeover occurs after unloading is completed.
4. If a changeover operation such as exchanging the head is required, guidance for the
operator is displayed at the operation panel of the machine. Follow the displayed
guidance and perform the necessary changeover work.

6.9.3 Automatic changeover usage precautions

Exercise caution regarding the following items when using the automatic changeover
function.
1. Jobs cannot be transmitted to the background from Fuji Flexa when the automatic
changeover function is being used. Jobs are either automatically transmitted to the
background by the automatic changeover function, or they can be reserved by
performing settings in the Next Production screen in Production Monitor.
2. For jobs, check the following items. If a job that does not satisfy the following conditions
is used for automatic changeover, the machine stops due to an error.
a. The job is suitable for the machine configuration.
b. There are no errors from the data check.
3. If an error stop occurs due to the conditions above not being satisfied, edit the job and
then recover using the following procedure.
a. Cycle stop all of the machine in the line.
b. Change [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration] of Accessory

Software to OFF.
c. Transmit the current job from Fuji Flexa as the next job.
Note: When performing dual lane production (two lane production of different jobs) and an error
stop occurs during operation, transmit the jobs for both lanes.
d. At the operation of the module at which the error occurred, change the job just
transmitted to the current job.
e. Change [Automatic changeover] in the [Machine Configuration] of Accessory

Software to ON.
4. If no panels have been produced with the reserved job, this job cannot be changed to
another job. If you mistakenly transmitted a job which is not in the production schedule,
use the following procedure to recover.
a. Before loading panels which are not in the production schedule to the machine.
• Cycle stop all of the machine in the line.
• Delete the automatic changeover schedule in Accessory Software.

Note: Refer to chapter 4, "5.6 Deleting the automatic changeover schedule" in the Accessory
Software Operation manual.
• Restart production.
b. After panels which are not in the production schedule have been loaded to the
machine.
• Cycle stop all of the machine in the line.
• Remove the panels which are not in the production schedule from the machine
by hand.
• Restart production and perform panel unloading.

Note: All panels currently being produced are unloaded.

• Change to the scheduled job.
• Restart production.
5. Be aware of the following points when editing jobs using MEdit.
a. For the first module in the line, do not transmit from Fuji Flexa the same job that is
being edited using MEdit. This may cause a job data error.
b. When using handy scanner mode, do not scan the barcode of a job that is the same
as the job being edited using MEdit.
c. When using barcode ID mode, do not let panels be loaded to a conveyor that has a
barcode reader (otherwise the barcode will be read).
6. In barcode ID mode, select [All] in the Panel ID Editor [Lane] setting.
30SYS-0388E
7. When using barcode reader mode, set up a panel conveyor with a barcode reader
before the first machine in the line. Do not set up a buffer conveyor between the
conveyor with the barcode reader and the first machine.
8. In barcode ID mode, single conveyors or shuttle conveyors can be used as conveyors

with a barcode reader.
Note: The “barcode ID mode” does not support dual lane production of panel with different widths.
9. The automatic changeover function cannot be used with the following.
a. Conveyor only function when a module is non-functional (breakdown mode)
b. Idling operation
c. Simulation operation
d. On-machine PAM

6.10 Vision Data Correction Function for Vision

Processing Errors
Usually, if a vision processing error occurs for a part, the machine rejects the part and
continues production.
However, if you do not wish to reject the part (due to the reasons given below), the vision
data correction function can be used to use the part again.
a. There is no problem with the part
b. The part is expensive or limited in quantity
6.10.1 Operation overview

1. Specify vision data correction settings for parts that you do not wish to reject
2. If a vision processing error occurs for a part for which vision data correction has been
specified, the machine stops.
3. Use MEdit to adjust the vision processing for the part to correct the error.
4. When production is restarted, the same part is placed on the panel.
6.10.2 Vision data correction guidance and procedure

If a vision processing error occurs during production, the machine stops and an error screen
displays.
30SYS-0413J
1. Start MEdit and modify the vision processing data. Refer to "5. Editing Jobs on the
Machine (MEdit)" in the AIMEX series Programming Manual for details regarding MEdit.
2. When you have finished correcting the data in MEdit, the main screen displays. Push
START to restart production.
Note: If for some reason the data cannot be corrected and the part cannot be used, push READY
ON. The error is cleared and the main screen displays. In this case, production restarts but
the part is rejected.

6.11 Hybrid Calibration Support

Hybrid calibration is a function for measuring and correcting placing deviations using a
dedicated stand and jigs.
When one of the following actions are performed, hybrid calibration is performed as part of
autocalibration.
a. The placing head is exchanged
b. The parts camera is exchanged
c. The parts camera mounting position is changed
d. The [Placement angle measurement/correction] setting in [Module Configuration] is

changed.
e. The [Hybrid calibration measurement/correction] setting in [Module Configuration] is

changed from "OFF" to "ON".
Chip jig part

Glass jig part
Mark
Hybrid calibration
stand 30SYS-0223E
6.11.1 Handling the jig parts

When performing hybrid calibration, both the jig nozzles and jig parts must be set correctly.
When handling the chip jig parts (GGAJ040*) and glass jig parts (AA7SA**), note the
following cautions.
a. When setting the glass jig part in the hybrid calibration stand, set the part with the
printed side face down.
b. When using H12HS, H12HSQ or V12 heads, do not set the glass jig part in the
module (this part is not used by these heads).
c. Always keep the surfaces of the jig parts clean.
d. When removing jig parts from the hybrid calibration stand, use soft plastic tweezers
or a similar tool in order not to scratch the parts and the storage unit.
e. Be careful to not drop the jig parts in the machine.

6.11.2 Starting measurement

After setting the jig nozzles in the nozzle station, push START on the operation panel.
Hybrid calibration is started and the placing deviations are measured.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0128
Note: When using an H04, H08M(Q), H12HS(Q) or V12 heads, ensure that all mechanical valves
are raised as far as they can go.
30SYS-0705
Note: Modules with H12HS(Q) or V12 heads do not use the glass jig part. Set only the chip jig
part in the module.
When using H12HS(Q), or V12 heads
Chip jig part
Glass jig part
30SYS-0442E

6.11.3 Regarding errors when measuring

The following are instructions on errors that may occur during hybrid calibration and how to
correct the error.
When the jig parts are not set in the hybrid calibration stand
When measurement is started, the mark camera is used to check the presence of the jig
parts in the hybrid calibration stand. If jig parts cannot be detected by this check, the error
guidance shown below is displayed.
30SYS-0225E
c. Set the jig parts in the hybrid calibration stand.

Note: If a jig part is being held on a nozzle, then gently remove the jig part by hand and set back
in the stand. Be careful to not drop and lose a jig part when setting it in the stand.
f. Push START. The machine resumes measurements.
When a vision processing error occurs for a mark on the stand

The marks on the stand and jig parts are vision processed by the machine to measure the
placing position and placing condition. If a vision processing error occurs, the error
guidance shown below is displayed.
30SYS-0226E

c. If the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a clean dry cloth. After
cleaning, set the jig part back in the stand.
Note: Be careful to not drop and lose a jig part when setting it in the stand.
When a vision processing error occurs for a jig part

The machine vision processes the condition of the picked up jig part and then
compensates. If a vision processing error occurs, the error guidance shown below is
displayed.
30SYS-0227E
c. Use a clean dry cloth to clean the jig part. After cleaning, set the jig part back in the
stand.
When a vacuum error occurs for the hybrid calibration stand

The stand uses vacuum to fixed the jig parts in place on it. If a vacuum error occurs, the
error guidance shown below is displayed.
30SYS-0228E

c. If the jig parts or stand marks are dirty, clean them with a clean dry cloth. Remove
any foreign objects that are in the stand. After cleaning, set the jig part back in the
stand.
6.11.4 Dedicated jig cleaning method

When errors occurs because the hybrid calibration stand or jig parts are dirty, use the
following cleaning method.
1. Use a cotton swab to remove any dirt or dust from the top of the jig parts.
Caution: Wipe the parts without using any water or solvents on the cotton swab. Also, be careful not
to scratch the jig parts.
2. Use a cotton swab to remove any dirt or dust from the fiducial marks on the hybrid
calibration stand.
Caution: Wipe the parts without using any water or solvents on the cotton swab. Also, be careful not
to scrach the marks.
6.11.5 Clearing an error when measuring from Accessory Software

When measuring hybrid calibration and error guidance is displayed, it is not possible to
clear the error by pushing READY ON unless the feeder pallet (or tray unit) is removed.
a function is available in Accessory Software to forcibly clear the nozzle exchange error.
Refer to "9.6.6Forcibly clearing errors" for how to clear errors using Accessory Software.

6.12 Conveyor Only Function When a Module is Non-

functional
It is not usually possible to continue production on modules that share a base with a module
that has items or servo motors that are not working. However, with this function it is
possible to use the conveyor only on the module with the problem and continue production.
Non-functional module
(coneyor only)
30SYS-0187E
Check the list below for the item that is non-functional. It is possible that this function cannot
be used depending on the non-functional item.
Can be used Cannot be used

Servo Amplifiers Servo motors CPU board Servo board
XY-robot Robot cables Vision DIO
processing board
Waste tape Nozzle changer Remote I/O Serial signal
processing unit (RS232C)
Nozzle station Mark camera IEEE-1394 Operation panel
Parts camera Device unit Safety doors
Conveyor Module control boxes
Air related items
6.12.1 Preparation procedures

If one of the items in the "Can be used" list is non-functional, follow the procedures below
to prepare the machine, and then restart production.
1. Check inside the module for any panels. If any panels are present, use the manual
mode panel removal command and remove the panel.
2. Remove the feeder pallet and then turn off the main switch in order to turn off the
machine.
3. If it is possible, remove the non-functional item. For example, remove the head if it is
the non-functional item.
4. Open the job for production in Fuji Flexa and distribute the parts allotted to the module
with the non-functional item to the other modules and save the job.
Note: If the job is to be optimized, do not select the [Reallocate Feeders] option. If this option is
selected, it is possible that feeders will be assigned back to the module with the non-
functioning item.
5. Turn on the main switch and wait until the modules boot and then automatically enter
sleep mode.

6. In Accessory Software, select [Module Configuration] and then perform settings for the
[Operation settings] category.
• [Breakdown operation mode]: select [Conveyor only]
7. Push POWER on the operation panel to wake the modules and then set the feeder pallet
on the module.
8. Transmit the job from Fuji Flexa to the machine.
6.12.2 Conveyor only (breakdown) operation

1. When a module is specified to convey panels only (breakdown operation) in the module
configuration settings and it is necessary to change the conveyor width, rotate the shaft
directly by hand.
Lane 2
width adjustment shaft
Lane 1
width adjustment shaft
30SYS-0189E
2. When the width has been changed, the sensitivity of the conveyor sensor must be
adjusted. Open Accessory Software, use the [Conveyor sensor sensitivity adjustment]
command from the remote commands in the machine accessories section.
3. Push START and production commences.

6.13 Robot Collision Warning Function

When heads are moved by hand for reasons such as maintenance, the front and rear heads
in twin robot machines may collide.
Side 2 Side 2 Side 2
Side 1 Side 1 Side 1 30SYS-0358E
Therefore, when two heads are in close proximity, the buzzer on the machine sounds and
the operation panel displays a robot collision warning.
6.13.1 Warning screen and how to resolve the problem

This section explains each warning screen and how to resolve the problem.
When there is a risk of collision at the X-axis
30SYS-0359E
a. Check that the Z-axis has been raised.
b. Move the head along the X-axis. When the head has moved a sufficient amount, the
warning screen disappears.
When there is a risk of collision at the Y-axis
30SYS-0360E
b. Move the head along the Y-axis. When the head has moved a sufficient amount, the
warning screen disappears.

When there is a risk of collision at the X and Y-axis
30SYS-0361E
b. Move the head along the X and Y-axis. When the head has moved a sufficient
amount, the warning screen disappears.

1. Before moving the robot, ensure that the Z-axis on the head has been raised. If the Z-
axis is lowered, it may collide with the conveyor rail.
2. Hold the movement handle to move the robot.
Linear motor
Linear scale
Handle for moving the X-axis
Handle for
moving the Y-axis
30SET-0004E
3. Even when the front and rear robots are in close proximity of each other, the collision
warning screen does not display in the following cases.
a. When the main power is on and immediately after POWER is pushed

Note: When START has not been pushed yet
b. When a head has not been set on the robot
c. When the machine is in sleep mode
d. When head or nozzle exchange is being performed from manual mode
e. When head exchange guidance is displayed during changeover

6.14 IPS Dust Detection Function

This function detects dust on V12, H12HSQ and H08MQ heads during production.
6.14.1 Error screen and how to clear error

This section explains how to clear errors when dust is detected.
30SYS-0397
1. Check which holder caused the error by looking at the sub code.
Note: The sub code gives the holder in hex format so 00000001 is holder A, 0000000A is holder
J, 0000000C is holder L and so on.
2. Push READY ON. The error is cleared.
3. Switch to manual mode and then remove the feeder palet (or tray unit).
4. Check the holder with the error. If there is any dust or foreign matter on the nozzle, clean
it.
Note: To clean the nozzle, use the nozzle exchange command to move the nozzle back to the
nozzle station.
5. Set the cleaned nozzle back in the machine, attach the feeder palet (or tray unit) and
restart production.

6.15 Network Error Detection Function

This section explains how to troubleshoot network related errors.
6.15.1 Duplicate IP address detection function

An error screen is displayed when the IP address for the AIMEX is the same as the IP
address for another machine on the network. If the AIMEX is currently performing
production, a cycle stop will occur.
Error screen and how to clear error
The duplicate IP address of

the machine is displayed.
M/C: Displays the MAC address of this machine.

???: Displays the MAC address of the duplicate IP address.
30SYS-0407E
a. Call a network administrator.
b. Refer to the information on the screen and change either the IP address for the
AIMEX or the IP address at the other machine.
c. After clearing the error, turn the machine on and off using the main switch located at
the front of the base.
6.15.2 Line Monitor disconnection

An error screen displays if the machine detects a disconnection with Line Monitor. If this
occurs during operation, production can continue but correct production information cannot
be acquired.
Line Monitor disconnection detected
30SYS-0408E
a. Stop the machine and call a network administrator.
b. Connect the machine to the Line Monitor server.
c. Confirm that the Line Monitor disconnection pictogram no longer displays at the
operation panel.

d. Perform a [Communication check] in Accessory Software to confirm that the network

is connected properly.
Note: Refer to "6 Checking the communication status of each machine" in "5. Utilities" of the Fuji
Accessory Software Operation Manual (online) for details.
6.15.3 Multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler server

An error screen displays if there are multiple connections to the Fujitrax Profiler server. If
the machine is currently performing production, a cycle stop will occur.
30SYS-0409E
a. Call a network (Fujitrax line configuration) administrator.
b. Check the Fujitrax line configuration settings. Stop any servers that are not
necessary.
Note: If the unnecessary servers are being used for other lines, change the connections.
• If the IP address displayed on the screen is that of an unnecessary server, stop

that unnecessary server.
• If the IP address displayed on the screen is that of the server you wish to
connect to, stop any unnecessary servers and restart the server you wish to
connect to.
c. Push READY ON.


6.15.4 Repeated connections and disconnections with host

An error screen is displayed if the connection to the network host is repeatedly broken. If
the machine is currently performing production, a cycle stop will occur.
The service name and IP address of the host which

was disconnected display. 30SYS-0410E
a. Call a network administrator.
b. Clear the network error by referring to the information displayed on the screen.
c. Push READY ON.

6.15.5 Clearing errors from Accessory Software

If errors cannot be cleared by pushing READY ON, it is possible that the communication
cable is not correctly connected to the connector in the base.
In this case, forcibly clear the error using Accessory Software, use manual commands to
remove the feeder pallet or tray unit and then check the connection.
Refer to "9.6.6 Forcibly clearing errors" for how to clear errors using Accessory Software.

6.16 Reducing Auto Calibration Time When

Exchanging Heads
This reduces the auto calibration time when heads are exchanged.
Normally, auto calibration is performed when heads are exchanged. However, when there
are calibration results saved from using a head previously on a module, it is used again and
calibration is not performed.
6.16.1 Operating while reducing calibration time when exchanging

heads
1. Push START on the operation panel to start production.
a. The machine performs auto calibration.
b. The measurement results are automatically saved.
c. Production is completed as usual.
2. After a different head is used, if the head for which step 1 was performed is put back in
the module and START is pushed, auto calibration is skipped and production is started.
Note: After START is pushed, guidance to exchange the jig nozzle may display on the operation
panel. If this occurs, push CANCEL to cancel the guidance and then push START again to
begin production.

1. When the parts camera position is moved or it is exchanged, previously saved auto
calibration results up to that point are cleared.
2. When the module, parts camera, or head is exchanged and even if the units are the
same types, if the serial numbers are different it is necessary to perform auto calibration
again. Clear the auto calibration results in Accessory Software.
Note: Refer to "Clearing auto calibration results" on the next page for details on how to clear this
data.
3. When the parts camera and head is removed and maintenance is performed and then
these are set back in the module, perform auto calibration again.
Note: Refer to "6.10 Remeasure calibration data" in the Accessory Software Online manual for
details.
6.16.3 Clearing auto calibration results

1. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software.
30SYS-0465E

2. Click [Manage Auto Calibration Data].
01SYS-0588E
3. Use one of the drop-down menus to display the auto calibration measurement results
for the applicable serial number.
01SYS-0589E
• Search by module: Select the applicable module serial number
• Search by camera: Select the applicable camera serial number
• Search by head: Select the applicable head serial number
4. Click [Clear]. All of the displayed auto calibration results files displayed in the list are
cleared.
Caution: Be aware that it is not possible to restore cleared auto calibration results.

This section explains what to do if errors occur when heads are exchanged and you are
using the function to reduce the auto calibration time.
Note: 1. RWB service is an abbreviation for Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service. For details
related to RWB service, refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual (Chapter 5, "3
System Administration").
2. If the error cannot be cleared by following the instruction in this section, stop using this
function.
RWB service connection error (0000A001)

Follow the procedures below to clear the error when the error code 0000A001 is displayed
in the error screen.
1. Check the status of the RWB service.
a. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software to
display the status reference page.

b. Click [Service List].
c. Click [Check] for [Checking and restarting RWB services].
d. Ensure that the [Status] for each server is "Normally running".
2. If the above does not clear the error, send a line change report and then restart the RWB
services and then check again.
3. If the problem is still not resolved, restart the Fuji Flexa communication server
computers on which the RWB service is installed. Check the status again from step 1.
4. If this still does not resolve the problem, cut the power to the machine at the main switch,
and then reboot the machine.
Insufficient hard disk space error when saving results of auto

calibration (0000A002)
1. Use the procedures from "Clearing auto calibration results" to clear auto calibration
results for unnecessary combinations.
2. Push READY ON at the operation panel to clear the error and then START to restart
production.
3. If the problem is not resolved by the above step, move Fuji Flexa communication server
and RWB service to computers which have a lot of free disk storage space.
Auto calibration results file import error (0000A003), or Auto

calibration results file import error (0000A004)
Follow the procedures below to clear the error when the error code 0000A003 or 0000A004
is displayed in the error screen.
1. Push READY ON at the operation panel to clear the error and then START to restart
production. Remeasure auto calibration.
computers on which the RWB service is installed. Check the status of the service again.
Auto calibration results import data parsing error (0000A005)

1. Remeasure calibration data.

details.

RWB service error (0000A006)

Follow the procedures below based on the sub error code to clear the error when the error
code 0000A006 is displayed in the error screen.
Sub error code Error contents
00000004 No file specified.
00000005 An attempt was made to open a file that exceeded file open
restrictions.
00000006 Opening a file that is already open was attempted.
00000007 Unable to locate the directory.
0000000B There is data remaining that was not read.
0000000C When attempting to change the file name, a file with the same
name already exists in the same location.
0000000E Unable to acquire the module number.
For sub error codes 00000004 to 00000006

1. Send a line change report and then restart the RWB services and then check the RWB
services status again.
computers on which the RWB service is installed. Check the status again from step 1.
For sub error code 00000007

1. Reboot the computer used as the Fuji Flexa communication server that has RWB
service installed.
For sub error codes 0000000B to 0000000C

1. Remeasure calibration data.
details.
2. If the previous step does not clear the error, clear the current auto calibration
measurement results data.
Note: Refer to previous "Clearing auto calibration results" section for details on how to clear this
data.
computers on which the RWB service is installed. Check the status of the service again.

6.17 Waste Tape Box Cleaning Guidance

This function prompts operators to clean the waste tape box by displaying guidance on the
operation panel during production.
30MEC-0449
6.17.1 Waste tape box cleaning guidance

Each time production of the specified quantity of panels is reached, guidance to clean the
waste tape box is displayed on the operation panel during production.
Module
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1 30SYS-0811
6.17.2 Cleaning the waste tape box

1. Pull out the waste tape box.
2. Cut the cover tape hanging down from the feeders with scissors.
3. Remove all of the waste tape and cover tape from the waste tape box.
4. Put the waste tape box back in the machine.

6.18 Panel height detection function

This function is used to measure the warp of panels on the conveyor.
By measuring the amount of panel warp and reflecting the result to the part placing height,
this can be used to stabilize placements based on the panel warp. In addition, when
excessive panel warp is detected an error occurs in order to prevent the production of
defective panels in advance.
Note: This function can be used with machines equipped with the PH2 sensor.
30SYS-0827
6.18.1 Procedures for specifying the panel height function

1. Edit the job. Specify settings in the [Module] tab of the machine configuration. Refer to
the AIMEX Series Programming manual for details.
6.18.2 Operating using the panel height detection function

1. Push START on the operation panel to start production.
2. If there are errors reading the panel height positions or the detected warp of the panel
exceeds permissible limits, the machine stops with an error.
3. Clear the error and continue production.

This section explains what to do if errors occur when using the panel height detection
function.
Panel height position (mark) reading errors

If reading is unsuccessful even after repeated attempts to read panel height marks, an error
stop condition occurs after unclamping the panel, and error guidance displays.
30SYS 0828

a. Push MONITOR and check the image.
b. Check the seek number (error code), and the position of the panel height mark from
the image.
c. Push READY ON. The error is cleared.
d. If necessary, change the position of the panel height mark in MEdit. After changing
the setting, update the job and resend it to the machine.
Panel warp exceeds permissible limits

If the panel warp is detected as exceeding the permissible limit, an error stop condition
occurs after unclamping the panel, and error guidance displays.
Note: The permissible limit based on our specifications is ±2.0 mm.
30SYS-0829
b. Remove the panel.
c. Check the warp of the panel. Adjust the support by backup pins and return the panel
if the warp problem can be corrected.
d. Attach the feeder pallet (or tray unit).
6.18.4 Outputting panel height measurement results to a file

From a remote command in Accessory Software, the panel height measurement results
can be output to files during production.
Outputting the data

Transmit the job you wish to produce and then perform the following procedures.
1. In the machine accessories section of Accessory Software, select the applicable

module.
2. Select [Remote operation] and then [Output panel height measurement data].
Caution: When this command is selected, any previously existing measurement result files are
cleared. If you need these previous files, then acquire these files first and then perform the
above command.

30SYS-0831E
3. Push START on the operation panel. Production is started and the panel height
measurement results for each lane is output to a file.
Note: The measurement results files are for each lane and these are saved in the base as text
files.
Even if [Output panel height measurement data] is selected, panel height measurement
data is not output to a file under the following conditions.
• Immediately after the main switch is turned on.
• The file size of the output file of one of the lanes reaches 1 MB.
• Immediately after a different job is transmitted to each lane.
• Immediately after jobs have been transmitted using [Multi lane transmission].
Acquiring the output data

Follow the procedure below to acquire the panel height measurement result data.

module.
2. Select [Data Acquisition] and then [Acquire Trace].
01SYS-0594E
3. Download the file and save it to the desired location.

Caution: When trace acquisition is performed, the files stored in the base are deleted. The files
cannot be recovered, so take care when managing the acquired files.
4. The saved files are compressed in lzh format. Using a file compression tool to
uncompress the saved file. The output panel height measurement files have the

following names.
Lane File name
1 PanelHeightL1.csv
2 PanelHeightL2.csv
Viewing acquired data

Open the acquired text files in a text editing program such as Notepad. The following are
the procedures to view the items in the file.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
01SYS-0595E
No. Field Contents
1 Job information Name and side of job in production ("T" or "B"),

revision
2 Panel ID Panel ID of panel in production
3 Panel size (X- Panel length (mm)

direction)
4 Panel size (Y- Panel width (mm)

direction)
5 Panel rotation Panel direction (deg)
6 Measurement X coordinate of the point where panel height

position X coordinate measurement is performed. (mm)
7 Measurement Y coordinate of the point where panel height

position Y coordinate measurement is performed. (mm)
8 Measurement results Panel height measurement (um)
9 Board number 1 to 7500: When measuring board height
0: When measuring panel height

Quitting outputting data

Ensure the machine is displaying the main screen and perform the following steps.

module.
2. Select [Remote operation] and then [Do not output panel height measurement data].
30SYS-0832E

6.19 Operation when IPS is broken

This allows production to be performed without using the IPS unit at modules with a V12
head. Use this to continue production using a V12 head with a non-functioning IPS unit.
Caution: Production is performed without performing IPS checks such as parts presence checks and
tombstone checks. When quality of the panel is more important, change the head to one
with a working IPS.
6.19.1 Operation using operation when IPS is broken

Beforehand, select "IPS not used" for [Operation when IPS is broken] in the module
configuration settings in Accessory Software.
A pictogram indicating that IPS is not being used is displayed in the status area on the
operation panel.
1 2 JOB Name Lane_2

JOB Name Lane_1 30SYS-0867
Push START as usual. The machine starts performing production without using IPS on that
head.
6.19.2 Clearing the mode for when IPS is broken

1. Stop the machine.
2. Set the head with the repaired IPS unit in the machine.
3. Change the [Operation when IPS is broken] setting in the module configuration to
"Normal production".
4. Remeasure auto calibration.
a. The calibration data for the repaired head is cleared.

Note: Refer to "Clearing auto calibration results" on the next page for details on how to clear this
data.
b. Remeasure calibration data.

details.

6.19.3 Clearing auto calibration results

1. Click [Status Reference] from the Floor Monitor page in Accessory Software.
30SYS-0465E
2. Click [Manage Auto Calibration Data].
01SYS-0588E
3. Use one of the drop-down menus to display the auto calibration measurement results
for the applicable serial number.
01SYS-0589E
• Search by head: Select the applicable head serial number
4. Click [Clear]. All of the displayed auto calibration results files displayed in the list are
cleared.
Caution: Be aware that it is not possible to restore cleared auto calibration results.

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 7. Using Manual Commands
7. Using Manual Commands

In this chapter, the manual command for when performing maintenance and other
specialized operations is explained.
7.1 Items Selectable from the Menu Screen

The main screen changes to display the manual mode screen. Refer to "3.3 Displaying the
Manual Mode Screen" for details on changing screens.
1 2 3 4
Module
1 2
5 6 7 8 30SYS-0472
No. Pictogram Explanation
When this command is used, the feeder pallet or

1 Cleaning command
tray unit-LT attached to the machine is unclamped.
This is used to position the head in different

Head positioning
2 locations to make working on the module easier
command
such as lubrication.
Select this command to check the pickup position

3 Job test command
for the part.
This is the diagnosis command and is used when

4 Diagnosis command
upgrading control software or direct loading.
Panel removal
5 This will lower the board lifters.
command
This is the exchange command and is used when

6 Exchange command exchanging the head, feeder pallet, or ejecting the
nozzles.
This command is used at machines loaded with

Head adjustment
7 the feeder type brush unit. This is also used when
command
removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part.
This is the information command and is used to

8 Information command
display information about the module and base.

7. Using Manual Commands SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
7.2 Cleaning Command

This command is designed to be used when cleaning is to be performed on the module.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the cleaning pictogram, then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0279
Note: After removing the feeder pallet with a PCU, set the PCU to the machine at this point.
PCU 30SYS-0275
2. Guidance displays to remove the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT from the machine. Push
OK.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0280

30SYS-0793
Note: After this, feeder pallet or tray unit-LT setting guidance displays at the operation panel.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
30SYS-0281
Caution
5. Perform any necessary maintenance.
6. Close the front door after completing maintenance.
7. Set a feeder pallet or tray unit-LT on the machine.

7.3 Head Positioning Command

Use this command to move the head to different positions in the module to enable easier
access to perform actions such as cleaning and lubrication. There are two possible
locations to position the head with this command.
Caution: Power to the head is not turned off when using this command. Do not remove the head.
• Move the robot to the front of side 1.
• Move the robot to the center of the machine.
Side 2 Side 2
Side 1 Side 1 30SYS-0277E

• Move the front and rear robot to side 1 and side 2 respectively.
• Move the front and rear robot close to the center of the machine.
Side 2 Side 2
Side 1 Side 1 30SYS-0276E
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the head positioning pictogram, and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0278
3

2. Use the arrow keys to select the pictogram that displays the desired head position, then
push OK.
ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵐ ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵐ
ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵏ ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵏ
30SYS-0478
Module
1
ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵐ ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵐ
ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵏ ᵱᶇᶂᶃᴾᵏ
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0284
3. The main screen for retracting the head is displayed. Push START to begin moving the
head.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0283
4. When the head has finished moving, the operation panel returns to the screen for
selecting the head retract position.
a. Push MANUAL to return to the main screen for production.
b. Push CANCEL to return to the manual command menu.

7.4 Job Test Command

This command is used to check or adjust the parts pickup position.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the job test pictogram, then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0285
2. The following screen is displayed.
1 2
Module
1 2
30SYS-0482
Pickup position check Use the feeder and tray parts set in the machine when
1
(device offset) performing device offset.
2 Clearing the quantity Clear the production quality of the panels displayed on
of produced panels the screen.
7.4.1 Pickup position check (device offset)

This command is designed to check and change the pickup position for feeders and trays.
When this command is used, the mark camera takes a picture of the pickup position and
displays the image in the image monitor on the operation panel.
This allows the pickup position condition to be checked and any required device offsets to
be determined and entered.
Caution: 1. When the pickup offset has been specified for a position at the machine, the pickup offset
is cleared for that position if a feeder with a different part comment is set in that position.
2. Pickup offsets cannot be specified for positions that are not used in production.

3. Specify the pickup offset for parts in the shape data if pickup cannot be performed due to
a reason such as pickup from the middle of the cavity is not possible due to the shape of
the part.
Pickup position
NXTMMS021
Set the feeders in the machine in accordance with the feeder configuration specified in the
job.
Note: Usually parts do not need to be present at the pickup position (during production, the feeder
is advanced before pickup). When the pickup position is to be checked, set the feeders in
the machine and then advance a part to be in the pickup position.
1. Select the pickup position confirmation pictogram and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0286
2. Select the unit and slot for which you want to check the pickup position. It is only possible
to check slots that are in the current job.
Note: 1. If it is required to advance the tape a specific amount in order to perform this command,
this information is displayed. Manually advance the tape the number of times indicated
plus one extra time. Refer to the Fuji Intelligent Feeder Manual for information on
advancing feeders.
2. It is not necessary to specify the stage for the AIMEX machine. The [SUB] setting (for
subslot) is only valid for parts from a tray unit.
3. When using the free allocation function, the data displayed for [Device Comment] and
[SLOT] is for the actual position selected.
a. Use the arrow keys on the operation panel to display the relevant stage and slot
number.
STAGE 1 SLOT 1
UNIT Feeder SUB -
30SYS-0484

b. If the feeder set OK button icon displays, the slot can be selected by pushing the set
OK button on the feeder.
STAGE 1 SLOT 1
UNIT Feeder SUB -
1 2 3 4
30SYS-0485
3. Push START. The machine performs calibration and then checks the pickup position.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0405
Note: If the START button pictogram is not displayed, the START button is disabled. In this case,
check the device.
30SYS-0487
4. Once the check is completed, the operation panel displays the image in image monitor.
Check the offset value using the gradations in the image from the mark camera.
NXTMMS014

5. Push MONITOR to display the check position selection screen.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0794
6. Push OK and then follow the steps below to specify device offsets.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0406
7. The device offset settings screen displays. Use the arrow keys to specify the device
offset values.
OffsetX 12.3 mm
OffsetY -12.3 mm
Clear
30SYS-0490
a. Use the up/down arrow keys to select the offset direction (X, Y).
b. Use the left/right arrow keys to change the offset values in increments of 0.01 mm.
Holding the arrow keys down changes the values in increments of 0.1 mm.
8. After specifying the offset values, push OK to apply the values. To check the pickup
position at Image Monitor after setting the values, push START and then repeat the
procedure from step 4.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0406
Note: If CANCEL is pushed, then no changes are registered for the offset values.

9. When the values have been set, the operation panel returns to the pickup position check
screen. For slots at which indexing has already been performed, the required reverse
index count displays in the screen. Manually reverse index the parts tape the specified
number of times plus one extra time.
Note: Always return the parts tape to its original position before commencing production. Failure
to do may result in damage to parts. When a part is present in the pickup position of a set
feeder, the part is not returned from the pickup position even if the feeder is indexed back
by the specified pitch. If production is started in this condition, the part in the pickup position
is scrapped. Due to this, index the feeder one extra time more than the specified pitch.
10.Use the following procedure to switch screens from the pickup position check screen.
Clearing device offsets made at the machine

Device offsets specified on the machine are cleared under the following conditions.
• A feeder with a part with a different part comment is set in the slot.
• When a tray part with a different device comment is supplied.
• A part is changed through splicing (the part comment for a spliced part is
different (when using AVL).
• The device offsets are manually cleared.
The procedure for manually clearing the device offsets for a feeder is provided below.
1. From the device offset screen, select the Clear pictogram and then push OK. The
offsets change to zero (0).
OffsetX 0.12 mm
OffsetY -0.12 mm
Clear
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0404
Note: If CANCEL is pushed instead of OK then any previously registered values are not cleared.
2. Push OK again to reset offset values to "0". The check position selection screen displays
again.

7.4.2 Clearing the quantity of produced panels

Use this command to clear the number of panels that have been produced to enable
management of the quantity of panels produced.
This command only clears the display of the quantity of panels produced on that module for
the current module. This does not affect production or Profiler information.
1. Use the arrow keys to select the production quantity clear pictogram and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0419
2. Select the clear pictogram and push OK, then the quantity of panels produced for the
current job is cleared.
AIMEX-TEST-01 12
AIMEX-TEST-01 12
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0420
Note: 1. If the quantity is to not to be cleared, select the return pictogram or push CANCEL on the
operation panel.
2. If there is a panel on the conveyor in the module, the lane icon for that lane is red. The
display of the quantity of panels produced is also cleared in this case.
3. When performing dual lane production and you wish to clear the display of the quantity of
panels produced for a specific lane, select the clear icon for that lane. Use the arrow keys
to select the icons.
lane2
lane1
AIMEX-TEST-01 12
AIMEX-TEST-01 12
30SYS-0495

7.5 Diagnosis Command

This command is designed to be used when upgrading control software, directly loading
matrix software and so on.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the diagnosis pictogram, and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0289
2. Select the diagnosis command and then push OK.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0290
Caution: An hourglass timer displays at the screen when diagnosis begins. Do not operate the
machine during this time.
3. Wait until diagnosis is complete and then perform any necessary operations.
30SYS-0498

7.6 Panel Removal Command

This command is designed to be used when removing a panel from the module.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the panel removal pictogram, and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0292
PCU 30SYS-0275
2. The main screen for removing a panel is displayed. Push START.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0293

3. Guidance displays. Push OK.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0294
30SYS-0793
Caution

6. Remove the panels from the lanes.

Note: The top plate for the front rail of the lane can be slid back to allow easy removal of the panel.
After removing the panel, be sure to slide this plate back into the original position.
30SYS-0295E
7. After the panel has been removed, push OK. Guidance displays to set the feeder pallet
or tray unit-LT at the machine.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0795

7.7 Exchange Command

This command is designed to be used when exchanging units on the module.
1. Use the arrow keys to select the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0296
1 2 3
Module
1 2
4 5
30SYS-0504
Exchanging When this command is performed, the feeder pallet

1
devices which is attached to the machine is unclamped.
When this command is used, the nozzles on the head

are ejected back to the nozzle station. Nozzles can also
2 Ejecting nozzles
be exchanged by removing the nozzle station from the
module.
When this command is used the head is moved to the

3 Exchanging heads
removal location and the power is cut for the head.
When this command is used, lane 1 and 2 move to their

Maximize conveyor
4 maximum width. This means the following work can be
width
performed.
Exchanging backup When this command is performed, backup plates can

5
plates be exchanged.
Select a command and then push OK. If the exchange command is used at the side that
operation is enabled, it is possible to also perform exchange at the opposite side. Switch
between sides to enable operation when necessary and then perform the work.

7.7.1 Exchanging devices

1. Select the device exchange command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0298
PCU 30SYS-0275
2. Guidance displays to remove the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT from the machine. Push
OK.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0299

30SYS-0793
Note: After this, feeder pallet or tray unit-LT setting guidance displays at the operation panel.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
30SYS-0281
5. When attached back in the machine, the manual command menu is redisplayed.

7.7.2 Ejecting nozzles

1. Select the nozzle exchange command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0301
PCU 30SYS-0275
2. The main screen for exchanging nozzles is displayed. Push START.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0302
Note: Nozzles on the head are returned to the nozzle station.

ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0303
30SYS-0793
Caution
6. Remove the nozzle station and exchange nozzles or replace the nozzle station.

7. When the work is complete, push OK. Guidance displays to set the feeder pallet or tray
unit-LT at the machine.
Module
Stage 1
1 2 Module
ENABLE LOCK
1
Stage 1
1 2
30SYS-0796
Note: Return to the unit exchange menu screen if other units have to be exchanged. Push
CANCEL.
7.7.3 Exchanging heads

1. Select the head exchange command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0670
PCU 30SYS-0275

2. The main screen for exchanging heads is displayed. Push START.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0305
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0306
30SYS-0793

Caution
6. Replace the head. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference
manual for details on how to replace the head.
7. When the work is complete, push OK. Guidance displays to set the feeder pallet or tray
unit-LT at the machine.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0797
CANCEL.
9. Set an feeder pallet or tray unit-LT on the machine.

7.7.4 Maximizing the conveyor width

When this command is used, lane 1 and 2 move to their maximum width. This means the
following work can be performed.
• Removing backup pins set on the backup plate
• Cleaning the backup plate surface
• Performing maintenance on the conveyor
1. Select the mazimize conveyor width command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0362
PCU 30SYS-0275

2. The main screen for exchanging backup plates is displayed. Push START.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0363
Note: This action makes the conveyor move to its maximum width.
3. Guidance displays. Push OK and then carefully remove the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT.
Module
Width
Lane2 280 mm
Lane1 280 mm
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0364
30SYS-0793

Caution
6. Remove the backup pins and then perform the intended work such as cleaning the
backup plate.
7. Push OK. Guidance displays to set the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT at the machine.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0365
CANCEL.
7.7.5 Exchanging backup plates

When this command is performed, backup plates can be exchanged.
1. Select the backup plate exchange command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0307

PCU 30SYS-0275
2. The main screen for exchanging backup plates is displayed. Push START.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0308
Note: This action makes the conveyor move as close as possible to side 1 and moves the
adjustable rail for lane 2 to side 2.
Module
Width
Lane2 280 mm
Lane1 280 mm
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0309

30SYS-0793
Caution
6. Replace the backup plates. Refer to "4. Basic Operation" in the AIMEX Mechanical
Reference manual for details on how to replace the head.
7. Push OK. Guidance displays to set the feeder pallet or tray unit-LT at the machine.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0798
CANCEL.

7.8 Head Adjustment Command

The feeder type brush unit is used when cleaning nozzles.
Note: Only H12HS, H12HSQ and V12 heads are supported. This function is for standard nozzles.
1. Use the arrow keys to select the head adjustment pictogram and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0310
Module
1 2
1 2 3
30SYS-0526a
Cleaning the Use this command to clean the nozzles currently on the
1
nozzles on the head head and the thermal compensation marks on the head.
Use this command to clean all of the nozzles on the

Cleaning all of the
2 head and in the nozzle station as well as the thermal
nozzles
compensation marks on the head
Removing the This command is used when removing the hybrid

3 hybrid calibration calibration chip jig part from the storage unit for jig parts.
chip jig part
Select a command and then push OK.

7.8.1 CleanDing the nozzles on the head

1. Select the nozzle cleaning command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0312a
2. The main screen for cleaning nozzles on the head is displayed. Set the feeder type
brush unit at a slot and then push START.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
30SYS-0313
Note: The pictogram displays while the nozzles are being cleaned. When nozzle cleaning is
finished, the screen returns to the head adjustment menu.
Refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details on how to use the unit.

7.8.2 Cleaning all of the nozzles

1. Select the clean all nozzles command and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0315a
2. The main screen for cleaning all the nozzles is displayed. Set the feeder type brush unit
at a slot and then push START.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
30SYS-0316
Note: The pictogram displays while the nozzles are being cleaned. When nozzle cleaning is
finished, the screen returns to the head adjustment menu.
Refer to the Feeder Type Brush Unit Instruction Manual for details on how to use the unit.
7.8.3 Removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part

This command is used when removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part from the storage
unit for jig parts. Clean the removed hybrid calibration chip jig part before performing hybrid
calibration.
Removing glass jig parts is not supported.

1. Use arrow keys to select the pictogram for removing the hybrid calibration chip jig part,
and then push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0835
2. Waiting for START to be pushed displays. Push START.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
30SYS-0836
Note: The pictogram displays while the machine is operating. The chip jig part is moved to the
placing area from the storage unit of the jig stand.
30SYS-0837

3. Guidance displays when the command is completed. Push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0838
4. Gently remove the unclamped feeder pallet from the machine.
30SYS-0793
Caution
opened (moved up). This is due to the possibility that it might come
back down and injure any body parts in the way.
6. Remove the hybrid calibration chip jig part.
01SYS-0952

Note: When removing jig parts, use soft plastic tweezers or a similar tool in order not to scratch
the parts and the storage unit.
Caution
Be careful to not lose the jig parts such as by dropping them in the
module.
7. Clean the hybrid calibration chip jig part. Check the surface and if there is any dirt, use
a cotton swab to remove it.
Note: Do not use any water or solvents.
8. Set the hybrid calibration chip jig part in the jig stand.
01SYS-0953
10.Insert the feeder pallet into the machine.
Perform the work in the same manner for the other side.

7.9 Information Command

Information for the module, base, or each unit set in the module will display if this command
is selected.
1. Use the arrow keys to highlight the information pictogram, and push OK.
Module
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0318
2. Information is displayed at the operation panel.
Module
1 2
30SYS-0532
3. Push the arrow keys and the module/base information is displayed.
Module Module
1 1
1 2 1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0320

Unit Information Displayed

Module Type
Serial number
Application version number
Recovery count
Base IP address of the base
Conveyor Conveyor type
Software version
Motor bank version (M1 to M5)
Panel transport interface board version (Displayed only for
the two end modules on the base)
Tray Unit-LT Type
(if mounted) Software version
Option information
RFID version
Tray Unit-M ID number
Feeder Pallet ID number
Feeder pallet levelness measurement data (Calibration [um])
Feeder (feeders on the Slot number set
feeder pallet) ID number
Software version
Part Camera and Mark Camera type
Camera Serial number
Software version
Head ID number, head option
Serial number
Software version
Nozzle Station ID number
Serial number
Nozzles Socket number
2D code number
Calibration table Software version, calibration values, filter values, so on

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 8. Accessory Software
8. Accessory Software
Accessory Software is an application that brings together various tools used for things such
as production preparation and for non-production related commands. This chapter
contains a summary of the main functions in Accessory Software.
8.1 Functions
Accessory Software is used to perform the following operations.
• Checking the machine operation status and searching for errors

• Specify machine configuration settings
• Specify module configuration settings
• Acquire machine information such as trace data and images
• Managing calibration values such as feeder pallet levelness measurements
• Remote commands such as software updates and forcibly clearing errors
For further details on how to use Accessory Software, refer to the online Fuji Accessory
Software Operation.
Click here to display the Accessory

Software Operation Manual.
30SYS-0865-E
8.2 Starting Accessory Software

If Accessory Software is installed in a network environment, Accessory Software can be
accessed by any computer with Internet Explorer.
1. Double-click the [Internet Explorer] icon on the desktop.
2. Enter the address (URL) "http://<FUJI accessory software server name>/fujiweb/" and
then press [Enter]. When application preparation is complete, Accessory Software main
screen appears.

8. Accessory Software SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
8.3 Floor Monitor

Floor Monitor displays the status for all lines and machines in the factory.
8.3.1 Floor Monitor fields and their meanings

The screen is refreshed every 15 seconds in order to always give the latest information.
6
3
AIMEX2
1 2 4
5
30SYS-0800E
Number Name Description

1 Line Name This displays the line name.
2 Link Icon Area Click the icon for the item you wish to display.
Displays the pages for specifying machine settings.
Displays the pages for vision processing error analysis.
Displays the pages for viewing the placing time history.
Displays the pages for production plan progress monitor.
Displays errors that occurred when using the automatic

changeover function.
Displays the pages for maintenance warnings.
Displays the pages for trace data that is automatically
acquired when errors occur.
Displays the pages for the nozzle list. When the background
for a nozzle is yello that indicates that the nozzle needs
maintenance. 30SYS-0322aE
3 Equipment Name This displays the machine name and module number.
Click the machine or module to open the machine
accessories screen..
M1 M2-1
M2-2
M1 M2 30SYS-0754


4 Module Status This displays the status for the selected module. If
the module is in an error status, the cause also
displays. Click the error cause to open the Error
Details screen.
5 Job Name This displays the current job name. Click the job
name to open the Trend screen.
6 Line Configuration This displays the line module configuration. Click a
module to check the current status of that module.
7 Service List This displays the service list. Click here if the line
configuration displayed in the floor monitor does not
match the actual line configuration.

8.4 Vision Processing Error Analysis

When a vision processing error occurs during production, the related image is acquired
from the machine and displayed. Furthermore, by using VPDplus, shape data can also be
edited. This function allows prompt rectification of vision processing errors.
8.4.1 Information displayed in the vision processing error analysis

screen
Click the right icon in the [Link Icon Area] of the Floor Monitor to open the vision processing
error analysis screen. The vision processing error analysis screen displays the image,
date, slot, part number, shape name and error code for the specified module.
30SYS-0323E
Below is an explanation of the screen items.

1 Module Selects the module (robot) to perform vision processing error
analysis.
M1 M2-1
M2-2
M1 M2 30SYS-0754
2 Sort by Displays the image in data order or slot order.

3 Image Displays the image acquired when the vision processing
error occurred.
4 IPS image Displays the IPS image at the time of a vision processing
error.
5 Download Click to save or edit the part image. Use VPDplus to edit.
6 Download Click to save the IPS image. Check the IPS image in
IPSViewer.
7 Date Displays the date and time the vision processing error
created occurred.
8 Slot Displays the slot the parts from which the vision processing
error occurred came.


9 Part Displays the part number used by the part for which the error
number occurred.
10 Shape Displays the shape name used by the part for which the error
name occurred.
11 Error code This displays the error code of the error that occurred during
vision processing. Click the error code to display the error
details.
12 Holder Displays the holder name on which the IPS vision processing
error occurred.
13 IPS Error This displays the error code of the error that occurred during
IPS vision processing. Click the error code to display the
error details.
14 Exit Exits vision processing error monitoring. The images
monitoring acquired will not be deleted.
15 Redo Redoes vision processing error monitoring. This deletes all
monitoring images acquired and starts without any error status.
16 Vision Specify whether to start vision processing error monitoring.
processing Click to display the vision processing error analysis screen.
settings
8.4.2 Making vision processing error monitoring settings
30SYS-0324E
Below is an explanation of the screen items.

1 Module Selects the module to perform vision processing error
analysis.
2 Always save the Select this check box to always save the image for vision
error image processing errors.


3 Monitor check Select this check box when you want to monitor vision
processing errors for the slot.
4 Slot Displays the slot for which vision processing errors will be
monitored.
5 Part number Displays the part number of the part in the slot.
6 Shape name Displays the shape data name of the part in the slot.
7 Save pickup error Select this check box when images are to be acquired for
pickup errors.
8 Error code When vision processing errors for the specified error codes
occur, the image for that vision processing error is saved.
9 Back Deletes settings and returns to the vision processing error
analysis screen.
10 Clear Clears the specified settings. To update the settings at the
machine, click [Apply].
11 Set all Specifies the same settings for all slots. This changes all of
the slots on the module to be the same setting.
12 Apply Updates the specified settings to the machine.

8.5 Warnings
If the success rate of the product being assembled drops, a warning is sent to the machines,
which can be viewed by operators. If the productivity then goes back above the specified
success rate, the warning condition is removed.
This allows users to act on drops in productivity in real-time.
8.5.1 Displaying warnings

Click [Warnings] from the Menu to display the current warnings.
8.5.2 Warning information

The warning screen is updated every 15 seconds to display the current status. The
selection box for the production line displays at the top of the screen.
Select the name of the production line of which to monitor the warning status. The default
is [All]. To display warnings for a single line only, select that line name from the drop-down
list.
30SYS-0336E
The description of the items from the screen above are provided in the following table.

1 Line name This displays the name of the line for which warnings are
currently displayed.
2 Machine name This displays the name of the machine for which warnings
are currently displayed.
3 Slot This displays the name of the slot for which warnings are
currently displayed.
4 First warning This indicates the time the warning status first occurred.
The warning has continued as is from this time.
5 Latest time This indicates the most recent time for the warning status.
6 Success rate Displays the success rate when warnings occur.


7 Error count by Warnings display separately in order of highest
code incidence. The error code, error description, and count
display. This allows users to efficiently prioritize
countermeasure actions.
8 Error graph This displays a graph showing the transition of errors over
time. Determine time periods of high errors using this
graph. For example, a strong upward trend (to the right)
indicates a high priority to take action, or continuing errors
indicates the negligence of a problem.
8.5.3 Displaying current warnings

Click [List] in the header menu to display the current warnings in the order of occurrence.
The warnings monitor screen is updated automatically when a warning occurs. From this
display, it is possible to see at which production lines or modules the warnings are
occurring.
NXTAS0028E
The items displayed and their descriptions are as follows.
Number Description
1 Select the check box to select that item.
2 Displays a list of the currently active warnings. This section displays the line
name, equipment name, slot, current success rate, and the latest error.
3 Click to display the warning information details view.
4 Click to select all check boxes for the lines.
5 Click to clear the check box for the selected item.
8.5.4 Displaying warning details

Click the details icon in the warnings list screen to show further information about the
warnings. Plan countermeasures for the errors and prioritize these countermeasures
based on the problems with the highest frequency which can be determined by the error
code counts.

8.5.5 Displaying the warnings log list

Click [Log] in the header to display the warning log which displays previous warnings.
30SYS-0337E
Number Description
1 Indicates the date of the warning.
2 Indicates the name of the line at which the warning occurred.
3 Indicates the name of the equipment and module number at which the warning
occurred.
4 Indicates the nature of the warning and the slot at which the warning occurred.
5 Indicates the current page number being displayed from the log. To view other
pages, click the relevant page number.
6 Clears the warning log.
8.5.6 Setting the success rate

Click [Success Rate] in the header to display the sucess rate screen.
Set the success rate for each production line, or for all the lines.
NXTAS0030Ea
Number Description
1 Specify the items for which the success rate settings are to be made. If "All lines" is
selected and [Apply] is clicked, then the success rate settings will be for all lines.
2 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate warnings are issued.
The default value is 99%.
3 Specify a success rate from 0 to 99.99 % at which success rate errors are issued.
The default value is 0%.
4 Click this to return the warning and error settings back to the default settings. Click
[Apply] after clicking this to enable the default settings.
5 This applies the specified success rates for the warnings and errors. Click this to
enable the currently set values.

8.6 Messages
This function allows users to distribute information between shifts and Accessory Software
users within the network.
The five most recent messages display in the lower section of the Menu.
30SYS-0338E
8.6.1 Displaying messages

Click the icon for a message in Menu to display that message. Click [To List] to display the
entire list of messages and to access the message editing function.
1
30SYS-0339E

8.6.2 Adding messages

To add a message, click [Add] from the message list. Enter the desired message and
specify the necessary settings and then click [Apply] to save the message.
30SYS-0341E
8.6.3 Editing messages

To edit a message, click the icon for that message and the message is displayed. To edit
the message, click [Edit]. To delete the selected message, click [Delete]. To close the
screen without making any changes, click [Cancel].
30SYS-0340E

8.7 Error Search

Click [Error Search] in the menu to open the error search screen.
30SYS-0343E
Enter the error code to search for in the search text box and click [Search]. A list of the
items that match the entered text is displayed.
30SYS-0342E
Click the link of the item from the list to display the details for that item. If [Edit] is clicked
from the details page, it is possible to edit the selected message.

8.8 Service List

This screen displays the current working status and version of the realtime workingrate
buffer services installed on the computers with the Fuji Flexa machine communication
service to which an AIMEX is connected. In addition, the computers with this service are
listed.
From this screen, it is also possible to started the installation of the realtime workingrate
buffer service on the current computer.
8.8.1 Displaying the services

1. Click [Service List] from the header in Floor Monitor.
2. The names of the computers with the realtime workingrate buffer service installed are
displayed along with the service version and working status.
NXTAS0039Ea

1 [Check] for RWB Click this to display a list of the RWB services and their
services status.
2 [Check] for network Click this to display a list of the network connections and their
connection status.
3 [Check] for individual After specifying the network item to connect to, click this to
network connections check the network connection status to that item. It is
possible to use the host name or IP address of the item to
check in the textbox.

8.8.2 Downloading the realtime workingrate buffer service installer

1. Click [Download] in the lower section of a Floor Monitor.
2. Downloading begins when [Fuji Real Time Workingrate Buffer Service] - [Download] is
clicked.
01SYS-0378E
3. Click [Save] in the dialog box that displays.
4. Specify the location to save the downloaded file and click [Save]. The file is downloaded
to the specified location.

8.9 Acquiring Machine Trace Data Automatically

Settings can be specified in Accessory Software to automatically acquire trace data when
errors occur.
8.9.1 Displaying the auto trace data screen

Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.
30SYS-0801E
8.9.2 Auto trace data screen items and their meanings

Error codes for errors that occurred display at the [Auto Trace Data] screen along with the
date and time at which they occurred and the module number.
2 3 4 5
6 30SYS-0423E

1 Auto Trace Settings Click to display the page for specifying auto trace settings.
Displays the time that the trace data was acquired from the
2 Date hr machine.
Displays the module from which the trace data was acquired.
3 Module For the AIMEX, the number refers to the number of the robot.
Displays the error codes included in the trace data that was
4 Error Code acquired from the machine. Click an error code to display the
error details for that code.
5 Save trace Press to open and save the trace data file.
6 Clear Click this to delete the acquired trace data.

8.9.3 Specifying automatic trace data acquisition

Click [Auto Trace Settings] in the top right of the [Auto Trace Data] screen. The [Auto Trace
Settings] screen is displayed.
30SYS-0424E
Refer to "7.2 Specifying automatic trace data settings" in chapter 2 of the Accessory
Software Operation Manual for details on settings.
8.9.4 The machine during automatic trace acquisition

After specifying automatic trace acquisition settings, if a specified error occurs during
operation, the machine acquires the trace data and then stops due to the error.
Screen during trace data acquisition Error clearance guidance
30SYS-0425E

8.9.5 Downloading trace data

1. Click the [Auto Trace Data] icon (shown below) in Floor Monitor.
30SYS-0801E
Note: A red icon blinks if there is trace data.
2. The acquired trace data can be downloaded by clicking the icon in the right column.
Caution: Trace data displayed here is deleted automatically after 1 week.
Save trace 30SYS-0426E
Note: For twin robot machines, download the trace data for both robots.

MEMO:

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 9. Settings and Management
9. Settings and Management

Operation settings can be specified for machines and individual modules to suit the
production conditions. Accessory Software is used to specify settings. This section also
explains how to manage calibration data and how to perform remote operation.
• Machine Configuration
• Module Configuration
• Data Acquisition
• Calibration
• Remote operation
9.1 Starting Machine Accessories

1. From Floor Monitor, click the machine or module number for the AIMEX for which
Machine Accessories is to be used. The Machine Accessories log on page is displayed.
2. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
30SYS-0344E
3. Enter the user password and then click [Log on]. The main menu is displayed.
30SYS-0345E

9. Settings and Management SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
9.2 Making machine configuration settings

These settings affect the entire AIMEX machine.
1. Click [Machine Configuration] to display the [Machine Configuration] screen.
2. When an item is selected at the [Category] selection box, the settings shown under the
list automatically change to match the selected category.
Category Item
Operation settings Changeover guidance settings
Recovery settings
Alternate feeder (Alternate tray) change condition settings
Nozzle cleaning settings
IPS dust detection settings
Pickup error prevention settings
Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent
collisions with nozzles setting
Allow 0402 parts to use different package data
Feeder supply check settings
Specify feeder indexing based on job
Mark reading settings Fiducial mark settings
Solder mark read settings
Panel conveyance settings Conveyor width settings
Panel clamp setting
Panel conveyance operation settings
Hexa Feeder cassette ID recognition
Error code used when reporting an empty pickup in
production information
Tray unit settings Tray pickup start point and movement direction settings
Tray unit LT/LTW settings
Host coordination settings Fujitrax settings
Automatic changeover settings
Skip boards at the machine setting

Category Item
Signal tower settings Machine status
Calibration settings Shorten auto calibration when replacing heads
Operation when placing height Operation when placing height measurement sensor has
measurement sensor has recognition errors
recognition errors
Priority operation setting Supply guidance priority settings
Command priority operation stage
Error display setting Language setting
3. Perform settings for each item as required. For details on the settings, refer to the
explanation list below the settings.
4. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].
5. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].
9.2.1 Specifying nozzle cleaning settings

This function cleans nozzles set on the head periodically during production. It also cleans
the thermal compensation marks on the head at the same time.
Note: Only H12HS(Q) and V12 heads are supported. This function is for standard nozzles.
30SYS-0230E
• [Nozzle cleaning during production guidance function]: [Used]
• [Nozzle cleaning interval]: [1 to 240] hours

Nozzle cleaning guidance displays when the specified amount of production
time has elapsed.
• [Not cleaned nozzle stoppage interval]: [0 to 60] minutes

This function stops production if nozzles are not cleaned within the specified
time. Production is not stopped if "0" is specified.
This function can be used with modules which have a feeder type brush unit.

9.2.2 Specifying IPS dust detection settings

This function detects dust on V12, H12HSQ, and H08M heads during production.
30SYS-0398E
• [Operation when dust is detected by IPS]:[Error stop]
This function can be used with modules which have V12, H12HSQ, or H08MQ heads
loaded.
9.2.3 Tray unit pickup order

The pickup order for tray parts may be different on Fuji machines compared to machines
made by other companies.
The first pickup position and the pickup order for tray parts can now be specified in
Accessory Software. This means that even partially used trays from machines made by
other companies can be used on the AIMEX.
Set direction
01SYS-0477E
Specify settings in [Tray unit settings] in [Machine Configuration].
1. Specify the starting pickup position for pickup from tray units.
30SYS-0417E
• Tray pickup start point]: Select one of the starting positions

Note: The starting pickup position from this setting is based on tray direction 0.
Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees

3 2 2 1
1 Lower right
2 Upper right
3 Upper left 3 4
4 1
4 Lower left
01SYS-0479E
2. Specify the movement direction for pickup from tray units.
• [Tray pickup movement direction]: Select either [Move in Y-direction]

or [Move in X-direction]
Note: The pickup direction from this setting is based on tray direction 0.
Direction: 0 degrees Direction: 90 degrees
1 2
1 Y-direction
2
2 X-direction 01SYS-0481E
Pickup order operation table

The following types of operation are possible by specifying the pickup order settings.
a. Settings: [Start from bottom right] and [Y-direction] (default values)
Direction: 0 degrees 90 degrees 180 degrees 270 degrees
01SYS-0482E

b. Settings: [Start from bottom right] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0483E
c. Settings: [Start from top right] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0484E
d. Settings: [Start from top right] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0485E
e. Settings: [Start from top left] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0486E
f. Settings: [Start from top left] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0487E

g. Settings: [Start from bottom left] and [Y-direction]
01SYS-0488E
h. Settings: [Start from bottom left] and [X-direction]
01SYS-0489E
Important points after setting the tray unit pickup order

Do not change the [Tray pickup start point] or [Tray pickup movement direction] settings
after supplying parts to tray units. This may cause the following errors.
a. Parts out guidance may display when there are still parts in a tray.
b. The machine may attempt pickup from an empty cavity.
9.2.4 Specifying automatic changeover settings(barcode ID mode)

The barcode attached to the panel is read and the machine performs job changeover to the
job matching the barcode ID before beginning production.
30SYS-0384E

• Use Verifier: Used
• Use Profiler: Used
• Automatic changeover: Used
• Automatic changeover mode: Barcode ID
The following procedure is required to enable the settings.
1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.
2. At the Floor Monitor screen, specify the following items. For more details regarding the
operation method, refer to "Chapter 4 Automatic Changeover Function" in the
Accessory Software Operation Manual.
a. Specify the Fuji Central Sever host name for each machine.
Note: Refer to " Chapter 4, 5.1 Setting up Fuji Central Server " in the Accessory Software
Operation Manual.
b. Create a panel type list.
• Click on the pictogram shown below to display the [Monitor] screen.
30SYS-0385E
• Click [Panel ID] at the top of the screen.
• Create a panel type list.

Note: Refer to "Chapter 4, 5.5 Editing the panel type list" in the Accessory Software Operation
Manual.
3. Log on to Fujitrax Web and click [Profiling Settings] from the [System Settings]. Specify
[Do not permit conveyance] for [Substrate conveyance at the time of scanning ID error].

9.2.5 Specifying automatic changeover settings (handy scanner

mode)
In this mode, a handy scanner is used to scan a barcode on a production command
document in order to change jobs and start production.
30SYS-0386E
• Automatic changeover: Used
• Automatic changeover mode: Handy scanner
The following procedure is required to enable the settings.
1. Insert the license dongle at the computer that has Accessory Software installed.
2. At the Floor Monitor screen, specify the following items. For more details regarding the
operation method, refer to "Chapter 4 Automatic Changeover Function" in the
Accessory Software Operation Manual.
a. Register the lines on which automatic changeover is to be performed.

Note: 1. Refer to chapter 4, "4.5.2 Registering lines that use the function for automatic changeover
using a Handy Scanner” in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.
2. When performing dual lane production (two lane production of different jobs), at the [Line
settings for the Auto Recipe Function] screen, select the check box for [Specify separate
barcode ID for each item].
b. Create a table for the relationships between the factory setup (lines and machines)
and the machine type IDs.
Note: Refer to chapter 4, "4.5.3 Creating a relationship table for the machine type ID and
equipment" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.
c. Create a table for the relationship between the production job and the production part
IDs".
Note: 1. Refer to chapter 4, "4.5.4 Creating a relationship table for the production job and the
production part ID" in the Accessory Software Operation Manual.
2. Changeover is only performed for jobs at lanes selected at the panel type editor screen.
To performed changeover at both lanes, select [All].

9.2.6 Specifying panel position correction function settings

This function is used to correct the stopping position of panels loaded onto the conveyor.
This function is particularly effective when using panels for which the stopping position may
be unstable due to the weight or shape of the panel.
There are two methods for correcting the panel stopping position. Select one and perform
operation.
a. Fiducial mark correction
• Fiducial marks on the panel that arrived at the conveyor are vision processed
and the panel stopping position is corrected.
b. Correcting using the panel edge
• The edge of the panel that arrived at the conveyor is vision processed and the
panel stopping position is corrected. To prevent reflections from the backup
plate, a felt paper plate must be attached.
Felt paper plate Type A Type B
Drg. No.:AA8AMxx Drg. No.:AA8ANxx 30SYS-0368E
• When correcting using the panel edge, set panel edge sequences in the job.
Refer to the AIMEX series Programming manual for details.
1. Specify panel transport settings.
30SYS-0204aE
• [Panel stopping position correction target]: select either [Machine], [Module] or

[Each job]
• [Panel stopping position correction]: select either [Correct based on fiducial

mark] or [Correct based on panel edge]

2. If [Module] was selected for [Panel position correction function settings], select [Send to
Machine], and then perform panel conveyance settings for the applicable module at
[Module Configuration].
30SYS-0205E
• [Panel stopping position correction]: select either [Correct based on fiducial

mark] or [Correct based on panel edge]
3. If [Each job] was selected for [Panel position correction function settings], it is necessary
to specify the following items in the machine configuration. Refer to the AIMEX series
Programming manual for details.
30SYS-0399
9.2.7 Specifying resupply settings for the tray unit-LT

This section explains how to specify either magazine A or magazine B as the resupply
magazine. Specify one magazine for production (original feeder) and one for resupply
(alternate feeder). Operators always supply parts to the magazine for resupply.
1. Specify Fujitrax settings.
30SYS-0207E
• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Not used]

• [Tray unit-LT/LTW Verifier]: [Not used]

Note: Ensure that one of the above settings is set to [Not used].
2. Specify tray unit-LT/LTW resupply operation settings..
30SYS-0206aE
• [Tray unit-LT/LTW resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A]

or [Part resupply from magazine B]
3. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.
30SYS-0208E
• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]
The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.
a. Change the status of the following feeder positions in both magazines (TULT ) to
[Reserve] in the machine configuration.
• For standard tray unit-LTs: [10-1] to [12-2]

b. Set the original trays in the production magazine (the one to be picked up from).
c. Optimize and then set the alternate trays in the supply magazine.
Note: Refer to the AIMEX series Programming Manual for details.

9.2.8 Dynamic alternate tray supply settings

Dynamic alternate tray supply is one of the operation modes for the tray unit-LT/LTW. One
magazine is specified as the production magazine and the other is specified as the supply
magazine. In this mode, operators set tray parts during production at any of the empty slots
specified for alternate tray use.
In order to use this mode, it is necessary to have a tray unit-LT/LTW that supports the
dynamic alternate tray supply function (see below for requirements).
• Tray unit with barcode reader
• Tray drawers with RFID tags
Dynamic alternate tray operation order

There are three operating modes that can be used for dynamic alternate tray supply. The
mode depends on the [Machine Configuration] settings in Accessory Software and feeder
setup specified in the job.
a. Mode A
Tray positions (job feeder setup) in the Alternate trays are set in the same tray drawer as the
production magazine original tray.
Dynamic alternate tray supply settings -
(machine configuration settings)
Operation 1. Parts are picked up from the original tray.
2. When parts run out, the empty tray is exchanged for
an alternate tray from the supply magazine.
3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.
b. Mode B
Tray positions (job feeder setup) in the Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the
Dynamic alternate tray supply settings Priority given to production magazines
3. Parts are picked up from the alternate tray in the
production magazine.
c. Mode C
Tray positions (job feeder setup) in the Alternate trays are set on a different tray drawer to the
Dynamic alternate tray supply settings Priority given to supply magazines


3. Parts are picked up from the new tray.
*Alternate trays in the production magazine are used
once all the alternate trays in the supply magazine
have been used.
Procedure
1. Specify Fujitrax settings.
30SYS-0844E
• [Fujitrax Verifier]: [Used]
• [Tray unit-LT/LTW Verifier]: [Part type check + position check]
2. Specify the alternate tray change conditions.
01SYS-0895E
• [Alternate tray change condition]: [Parts out]

3. Specify settings for the tray unit.
30SYS-0846E
• [Tray unit-LT/LTW resupply]: [Part resupply from magazine A] or [Part resupply

from magazine B]
• [Tray supply order]: [Slot number order]
• [Dynamic alternate tray supply device transition order]: [Priority given to

production magazines] or [Priority given to supply magazines]
Note:
1. For mode A, either option can be specified.
2. When you are specifying the supply order and you want to prioritize the use of old parts,
select the [Part registration time order] option.
Important points
The following settings are required in the job to enable the settings.
a. Specify settings so that all the original trays are in the production magazine.
• For mode A: Specify alternate trays in the same drawer as the original tray.
• For modes B and C: Specify alternate trays in different drawers to the original
tray.
b. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all slots
in the production magazine of the tray unit to [Fixed].
c. In the [Feeder Setup] tab of the machine configuration, change the [Status] of all slots
in the supply magazine of the tray unit to [Reserved].
d. Optimize the job.

Note: Refer to the AIMEX Series Programming manual for details.

9.2.9 Specifying settings for reducing auto calibration time when

exchanging heads
This reduces the auto calibration time when heads are exchanged.
Normally, auto calibration is performed when heads are exchanged. However, when there
are calibration results saved from using a head previously on a module, it is used again and
calibration is not performed.
01SYS-0586E
• [Shorten auto calibration when replacing heads]: ON
9.2.10 Function to prevent nozzle collisions from using the feeder

buttons
If the tape is indexed while the nozzle is picking up a part, the nozzle and tape may collide,
leading to possible nozzle drops and damage. This function disables buttons for feeders
being used in production to prevent this problem.
㹎㹕㹐㹃㹐㹐
01NST-1030
• [Disable feeder buttons during production to prevent collisions with nozzles

setting]:
　　[Prevent collision(H01/H02)] or [Prevent collision (All Head)]

Note: If [Prevent collision(H01/H02)] is specified, this function is enabled only for H01/H02 heads.
Also, this function is supported for the following feeder types and versions. If a feeder with
a version earlier than the versions indicated below is used, guidance to exchange the
feeder is displayed on the operation panel.
Feeder type Compatible software versions
W04b, W08b/W08c Feeder (W04b/W08b/W08c) V1.22 or

higher
W04f, W08f Feeder (W04f/W08f) V4.39 or higher
W8, W12(c) to W104 Feeder V3.21 or higher
9.2.11 Supply guidance priority settings

This specifies the guidance order when it is necessary to replenish trays and feeders at side
1 or side 2 of the machine.
01SYS-0813E
• Supply Guidance Priority]: Select either [Display order by side]

or [Display always tray supply]
Note: [Display always tray supply] is disabled when performing multi production.
[Display order by side]

Select this option when there are operators at side 1 and side 2.
When tray supply is completed, guidance for supplying feeder parts is then displayed on
the operation panel.
Even if parts need to be supplied on the opposite side, part supply guidance for the feeders
on the enabled side has priority and is displayed.
[Display always tray supply]

Select this option when there is one operator for supplying parts at side 1 and side 2.
If tray parts need to be supplied on the opposite side, guidance for supplying the tray parts
has priority and is displayed even if part supply for feeders on the enabled side has not been
completed.
The operator can check the parts that are required for the other side, collect these parts and
then move to the other side to supply parts. This helps reduce the distance that the operator
has to move.

9.3 Module configuration settings

Any changes to the settings made for the modules are only valid for the selected modules.
1. Select the module(s) to change.
2. Click [Module Configuration] to display the [Module Configuration] screen.
3. When an item is selected at the [Category] selection box, the settings shown under the
list automatically change to match the selected category.
Category Item
Operation settings Premounted parts height settings
Nozzle Statistical error settings
Read condition settings for Fujitrax Profiler Panel IDs
Breakdown operation settings
Placement point check function
Rescue function when the recovery limit is reached setting
Panel conveyance Panel stopping position correction (module)
settings
Panel stop offset
Tray unit settings Tray Unit LT/LTW, M pickup pressure setting
Tray Feeder Unit L, M pickup pressure setting
Optional unit Tape cutter/waste tape box unit settings
settings
Auto backup pin settings
Dip settings Dipping
Flux unit settings
Calibration settings Feeder pickup height setting
Thermal measurement for panels that require production over a long time
Placement angle measurement
Hybrid calibration
Thermal expansion correction when operating Part-camera-less
employment
Provisional measurement without matrix data function
Measurement for improving part pickup
4. Perform settings for each item as required. For details on the settings, refer to the
explanation list below the settings.

5. After all required settings have been specified, click [Send to Machine].
6. Once all changed settings have been sent to the machine, click [Close].
9.3.1 Nozzle statistical error settings

When using this function and the error rate for a nozzle exceeds a specified value then that
nozzle is skipped and not used in production.
30SYS-0212E
• [Change nozzles when statistical errors occur]: [Change nozzles]

• [Error count to decide statistical nozzle errors]: [Number of failed pickups before
statistical error occurs]
To enable this function, set spare nozzles in the nozzle station.
9.3.2 Breakdown operation settings

If a servo motor or other unit in a module is broken, this function allows you to use the
conveyor only on the module and continue production.
30SYS-0188E
• [Breakdown operation mode]: select [Conveyor only]
To enable this function, edit the job being used in production in Fuji Flexa. Feeders and
sequences allocated to the non-functional module must be allocated to other modules.

9.3.3 Auto backup pin settings

This function uses a picker mounted in the placing head to pick up automatic backup pins
from the stocker and place them on the backup plate.
30SYS-0191E
• [Auto backup pins]: [Used]
• [Numbers of auto backup pins for lane1]: number of backup pins used (1 to 20)
• [Numbers of auto backup pins for lane2]: number of backup pins used (1 to 20)
The job must be edited to enable these settings. Specify [Backup Plate] settings in the
machine configuration. Refer to the AIMEX series Programming Manual for details.
9.3.4 Hybrid calibration support

Hybrid calibration is a function for measuring and correcting placing deviations using a
dedicated stand and jigs.
30SYS-0224E
• [Hybrid calibration]: [Used]
To enable this function, set the required special jig nozzles in the nozzle station before
operation. Refer to "4.9.3Nozzle list" for details regarding jig nozzles.

9.3.5 Specifying the panel quantity to display waste tape cleaning

guidance
The waste tape in the waste tape box needs to be occasionally removed for continuous
production. By specifying this setting, operators are prompted to clean the waste tape
boxes through the operation panel.
30SYS-0812E
• [Quantity to produce before displaying waste tape cleaning guidance]:

0 to 9999 (panels)
Each time production of the specified quantity of panels is reached, guidance to clean the
waste tape box is displayed on the operation panel.
9.3.6 Settings for using operation when IPS is broken

This allows production to be performed without using the IPS unit at modules with a V12
head. Use this to continue production using a V12 head with a non-functioning IPS unit.
30SYS-0868-E
• [Operation when IPS is broken Head 1]

or [Operation when IPS is broken Head 2] : "IPS not used"
When the repaired head is set in the machine and normal production is to be performed, it
is necessary to remeasure auto calibration.

9.4 Data Acquisition

If a problem that cannot be resolved arises when using the machine, trace data and images
that may be useful in resolving problems can be acquired from the machine.
9.4.1 Acquiring trace data

Acquiring trace data is a two step process. The first step is to get the trace data from the
module to the server. The second step is to get the data from the server to the local
computer.
For details on how to acquire trace data, refer to section "4. Acquiring machine trace data"
NXTAS0022aE
9.4.2 Acquiring images

If a vision problem is encountered during production, the image file of the part can be a
great help in troubleshooting. When getting data from the machine, two modes are
available. In one mode, only the images that resulted in error are displayed. In the second
mode, all images in the module are displayed. Downloaded images can be viewed with the
Viewer software.
For details on how to acquire images, refer to section "5. Troubleshooting vision processing
errors" in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" of the Accessory Software Operation Manual
(online).
NXTAS0023aE

9.5 Calibration
The Calibration menu includes commands that are not normally used by users such as
matrix measurement.
9.5.1 On-machine PAM

When performing on machine PAM, the following operations are performed using
Accessory Software.
• Changing the module to on machine PAM mode.
• Acquiring PAM results.
• Sending the final offset file to the module.
01SYS-0452E
It is necessary to have dedicated jigs and use the correct measuring procedures when
measuring PAM. For details on measuring PAM, refer to "9. Measurement and Adjustment"
in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference manual.
9.5.2 Module camera calibration

When using a V12 head, modules without parts cameras can be used. In this case, the
accuracy corrections based on calibration performed for the parts camera do not apply.
Therefore, module camera calibration must be performed before production.
A parts camera must be loaded in the module before camera calibration can be performed.
Directly loading the software for calibration measurement

First, directly load the software for calibration measurement.
1. Install the calibration measurement software on the computer with Accessory Software.
Note: The software should be saved in the \fujiweb\masweb\directload\DEV_LEVEL folder.
2. Push MANUAL on the operation panel of the machine to display the manual command
screen.
3. Use the arrow keys to select the self-diagnostic pictogram and then push OK.

4. Select the diagnosis pictogram and then push OK.
5. Ensure that the hour glass display on the operation panel changes to the "engineering
panel" display.
6. Select the desired module in Accessory Software and click [Remote Operation].
7. Click [Direct loading].
8. Select [Feeder pallet levelness/4 nozzle head parts camera measurement software].
01SYS-0437E
9. Click [Start loading].

Note: The software used for measurement is loaded to the module. The software is loaded onto
the selected module and the module reboots automatically and enters measurement mode.
10.Push POWER at the module operation panel.
Performing module camera calibration and saving data

After directly loading the software for calibration measurement, follow the procedure below
to perform the measurements.
1. Transmit a job from Fuji Flexa to the machine.
2. Use the arrow keys (up and down) to select module camera calibration measurement.
Module camera calibration

measurement
30SYS-0353E
3. Push START.

4. After measurements are completed, save the data on the computer.
a. Select the desired module in Accessory Software and click [Calibration].
b. Click [Module camera calibration data].
c. Click [Save].
01SYS-0439E
Note: The file name is "[Module serial number]_cam.dat".
5. Click [Close] to return to the main menu after the data has been saved.
6. The machine returns to the main screen when it confirms that the data has been saved.
Note: After completing measurements, you can return to the main screen without saving by
pushing OK on the operation panel.
Registering the module camera calibration measurements in the

module
Use the following procedure to register module camera calibration data that has been
saved on a computer to modules. This is required in cases such as when the CPU box has
been replaced or when calibration data has been lost.
1. Load the calibration measurement software onto the module. Refer to the earlier section
" Directly loading the software for calibration measurement" for details.
2. Select the desired module in Accessory Software and click [Calibration].
3. Click [Module camera calibration data].
4. Click [Browse]. Use the dialog box that displays to specify the module camera
calibration data for the selected module that is saved on the computer.
5. Click [Send to Machine]. The file is sent to the selected module.
Browse
01SYS-0440E
6. After transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the main menu.

9.6 Remote operation

9.6.1 Updating software on the AIMEX
Select [Update software] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update the
software for each unit loaded on the machine.
Refer to "11.2Upgrading Unit Software" for details.
9.6.2 Upgrading machine control software

Select [Install machine application] from the [Remote operation] section of [Menu] to update
the control software for the machine.
Refer to "11.1Upgrading Machine Control Software" for details.
9.6.3 Specifying a production mode

Four modes are available for the operation mode.
30SYS-0348E
Mode Description
Production mode Production is performed.
Pass mode Only panel conveyance is performed.
Idle mode Parts or marks on the board are not vision processed,
(No vision processing, no and feeders do not index parts.
feeder indexing)
Idle mode Parts are picked up and feeders index parts. All parts are
(No panel conveyance, vision processed using vision type 253. In this mode,
VT253) panels are not loaded or unloaded between modules.
Change the part data in the job to match the vision type.
1. Select the module or modules that the operation mode is to be specified for and click
[Remote Operation].
2. Select the operation mode from the list under [Operation Mode].
3. Click [Operation Mode].
4. Click [Start] and the command is sent to the selected modules.

5. When transmission is completed, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.
9.6.4 Conveyor calibration

The conveyor calibration function is used to restore the correct movement of the conveyor
if one of the following errors occurs.
Error code “****0701” “****0703” “****0704”

“****0708” “****071D” “****0752”
Before using conveyor calibration, ensure that the main screen is displayed at the machine
operation panel. Also, check the following points.
• Safety relays are on.
• A feeder palllet or tray unit-LT is attached to the module for which conveyor
calibration will be performed.
• Safety doors are closed and EMERGENCY STOP is released at the module for
which conveyor calibration will be performed, as well as the adjacent modules.
1. When using paired production, ensure that the main screen is displayed at both modules
in the pair.
2. Select [Conveyor calibration].
30SYS-0349E
3. Click [Start].
4. The dialog box shown below is displayed. Click [OK] to start conveyor calibration.
01SYS-0178E
5. A message is displayed indicating the conveyor calibration was correctly completed.

When this message is displayed, reboot the machine.

9.6.5 Completing nozzle maintenance

Use the following command to change the status of nozzles in the nozzle station after they
have been cleaned so they can be used in production when using the simple periodic
nozzle changeover function.
Refer to "6.5Changing Nozzles Due to Statistical Warnings" for details.
01SYS-0209aE
9.6.6 Forcibly clearing errors

When the machine stops due to problems such as nozzle changeover errors or picker
upper limit errors, it is usually necessary for the operator to remove the feeder pallet or tray
unit and clear the error at the operation panel.
However, if the condition of the machine as it stopped makes it difficult to remove the feeder
pallet or tray unit, error guidance cannot be cleared at the machine. In these cases errors
can be cleared using remote operation.
Note: Forcibly clearing errors is an emergency procedure. Accordingly, it is recommended that
access permission for remote operation in the Security Tool Editor of Fuji Flexa be
restricted to line administrators.
1. Select the module with the error and click [Remote operation].
2. Select [Forced error removal] from the list.
30SYS-0351E
3. Click [Start] to clear errors from the selected module.

4. After completing the forced error removal, click [Close] to return to the remote operation
menu.

9.6.7 Specifying IPS brightness adjustment

There is a function in Accessory Software to set the IPS brightness to the value from when
the machine was shipped. This function can be used at modules with the following heads.
• H08MQ, H12HSQ, V12

Note: Firmware V2.01 or higher is required.
Use the [IPS brightness adjustment setting] function after performing head maintenance
(such as cleaning or replacing the fluorescent label, cleaning the lens/prism, or removing
the head cover and adjusting the brightness).
1. Select the module for which you wish to perform the function and click [Remote
operation].
2. Click [IPS brightness adjustment setting].
01SYS-0941E
3. Click [Start] to adjust the IPS brightness for the head on the selected module.
4. When complete, click [Close] to return to the remote command menu.

MEMO:

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 10. Using Software Tools
10. Using Software Tools

There are extra tools that are available on the AIMEX system media to perform actions that
Accessory Software cannot perform. This section explains how to use the different
software tools.
Software Description
Image Viewer This software is used to display the images acquired from the
machine. In addition to being able to display the images, it can
also display the details from vision processing and any errors that
occurred.
This software is installed from the system media onto the client
computer and is found in the ViewerSoft folder in the base directory
of the media.
NetworkSetting This software is used to change the current network settings for a
base.
In order to be able to change the network settings, the current IP
address of the base must be known.
This software does not need to be installed. It can be found in the

AIMEX\Tool folder on the system media.
VersionUp This software is used to change the current machine version on the
machine to the version on the system media.
In order to start the upgrade process, the current IP address of the
base to upgrade must be known.
This should be used only if the machine control software cannot be
upgraded through Accessory Software.

EmergencyInstaller This software is used when items cannot be upgraded normally
due to some error. The computer is directly connected to the item
to upgrade and this software is ran.

MotionToolMini This software is used to display the servo counter position, update
the servo parameters in the AIMEX machine, and to reset the
origin positions.
This software can be found in the AIMEX\Tool folder on the system

media.
TcpIpSetting This software is used to change network settings for a base when
the base is booted in emergency mode.
Unlike the NetworkSetting tool, the current IP address does not
need to be known. The software looks for a base using the default
IP address from emergency mode.
This software can be found in the AIMEX\Tool folder on the system

media.

10. Using Software Tools SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
Software Description
EquipmentCheck Can acquire information about each unit from the specified
module, check I/O states and single action operations. This is a
tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and performing
maintenance.
MEdit This software is used to perform basic editing of job data.
This is capable of acquiring the job on the AIMEX machine and
after the data has been edited, to send it back to the machine as
well as save the changes to the global directory.
Data Checker This software is used to perform a basic check of jobs edited in
MEdit and Fuji Flexa.
This should be installed on all computers with Fuji Flexa that are
used to make jobs for AIMEX machines. It is possible to download
the data checker installer from the download section of Accessory
Software.
IPS Viewer This software is used to display the images and results taken by
the IPS (Intelligent Parts Sensor) system on heads equipped with
the parts side view recognition function on computers.
These images are acquired from the module by Accessory
Software. It is possible to check things such as the nozzle
condition and the parts pick up condition in the images and check
the parameters used for determining the results.

10.1 Image Viewer

This is the software used to display and check the vision process results of images acquired
from the machines.
NXTST0001E
10.1.1 Installing Image Viewer

1. Insert the media with the software in the drive.
2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not

automatically displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the media.
3. Click [Select the required images and install] from the [Setup support tools for the
engineering panel] section.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Viewer Soft]
and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when
installation is complete, the final step is displayed.
5. Click [Finish] and installation is complete.
10.1.2 Checking images with Image Viewer

1. Click [Start] and then point to [Programs] and then [Image Viewer] and then click
[ImageViewer]. A [ImageView] window opens.
2. Click [Open] from the [File] menu.
3. Locate the location to which the image file from the machine was downloaded.
4. Double-click the file to select that file and display it in the view.
Note: It is also possible to just double-click the downloaded image file to open that image in Image
Viewer after installing the software.
5. Click [Display Result] from the [Image] menu. The display changes to display the vision
processing results and information.
6. Check any error messages and the condition of the part to help determine the
appropriate countermeasure.
7. When completed checking the data, click [Exit] from the [file] menu to close Image
Viewer.

10.2 NetworkSetting
This software is used to change the current network settings for a base.
The IP address for a base can be changed remotely with ease. It is necessary to know the
current IP address in order to change the IP address to an IP address that is appropriate
for the network. The AIMEX software tool, NetworkSetting, is used to change the current
network settings for a base.
NXTST0002E
10.2.1 Changing network settings

1. Insert the media with the software into the drive and open the drive through Explorer.
2. Double-click [AIMEX] to open that folder.
3. Double-click NetworkSetting.exe to start the software.
4. When requested, enter the IP address of the base for which to change the network
settings and then click [OK].
Note: If the current IP address of the machine is unknown, use the information command found
in manual mode on one of the modules to display the current IP address for the machine.
5. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text
boxes and click [Next].
Note: Even if not changing any of these items, these values must be entered using the current
values.
6. Specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a
domain is used.
7. Click [Next].
8. Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these
are used.
9. Once all settings have been completed, click [Ok] and the new settings are sent to the
machine.
10.Reboot the machine to enable the new network settings.

10.3 VersionUp
If the machine control software cannot be upgraded through Accessory Software then this
software is used to change the current machine version on the machine to the version on
the media. The current IP address of the base to upgrade must be known.
NXTST0003E
Refer to "11.1.2Using VersionUp from the AIMEX Tools" for how to do use this software.

10.4 EmergencyInstaller
This software is used when the machine is not working properly due to a problem such as
the one below.
• Installation of the machine application software was interrupted due to a power

outage or network communication error.
In this case, CPU recovery must be performed. Connect the CPU with the problem to a
computer and install the machine application software using Emergency Installer.
NXTST0005Ea
CPU locations are shown below.
<Base CPU>
Side 1
<Module CPUs>
Facing robot modules Single robot modules
Side 1
Side 1 30SYS-0443E

Perform the following work first.
1. Prepare the media with the software. Use the media with the same version as that
already installed at the machine.
2. After CPU recover, module configuration settings in Accessory Software must be

specified again. Make a note of the settings beforehand if you wish to use the same
settings.

3. Turn off the main switch and remove the covers and ducts to access the front of the CPU
you wish to work on. Refer to "Replacing the Control Box" and "Replacing the Module
CPU Box" in "7. Replacing Parts" in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference for details.
4. Prepare a cross ethernet cable. The cable must be long enough to connect the computer
to the module.
Note: Depending on the computer being used, it may also be possible to use a straight cable.
10.4.2 Recovering the base CPU

1. Connect the CPU box and computer using the cable.
2. Change the IP address for the computer to 169.254.0.200.
3. Change the silver toggle switch to up on the item to be upgraded. This means that the
next time the item is turned on, it will boot in emergency mode.
Toggle switch
01SYS-0283E
4. Turn on the power for the machine.

Note: A boot-up error displays at the operation panel. Ignore this and continue with the next step.
6. Double-click [AIMEX] and then [Tool] to open the folder with the installer.
7. Double-click EmergencyInstaller.exe to start the software.
NXTST0005Ea
8. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate the bin file for the CPU being
upgraded. (The file to be used is different depending on the unit type. Refer to the table
below for details.) Select the file for the unit being upgraded and click [Open]. The path
and files displays in the text box.
Unit type Bin file to be used
Base AIMEX\FujiInst\Fuji\System2\Program\System\Base2.bin
9. Click [Install] and the file is installed on the item in question. After installation is
completed, a message displays.
10.Click [OK] to close the message.
11.Turn off the machine.
12.Change the toggle switch on the CPU box back to the down position.
13.Disconnect the cable you connected to the CPU and re-connect the original cable.
14.Change the computer IP address back to the original value.

10.4.3 Recovering the module CPU

3. Move the toggle switch up. This means that the next time the item is turned on, it will
boot in emergency mode. When recovering CPUs on twin robot modules, move the
toggle switch up for the adjacent CPU too.
a. Single robot module CPU
Toggle switch
01SYS-0283E
b. Twin robot module CPUs
Toggle switch Toggle switch
30SYS-0444E

Note: If a boot error screen displays at the operation panel for machines with 2-robot modules,
check that both CPU toggle switches are set to the up position.
5. Perform the following steps.
a. Confirm that the STAND BY light on the operation panel changes from flashing to
being continuously lit. If the light continues to flash, contact your Fuji representative.
b. Push the POWER button.
c. Check that "SELFCHECK PASS" displays after a few seconds. Contact your Fuji
representative if "SELFCHECK FAIL MODULE" displays.
Note: The display may become scrambled after POWER is pushed. In this case, push MONITOR
on the operation panel.
8. Double-click EmergencyInstaller.exe to start the software.
NXTST0005Ea

9. Click [...] and use the dialog box that displays to locate the bin file for the CPU being
upgraded. (The file to be used is different depending on the unit type. Refer to the table
below for details.) Select the file for the unit being upgraded and click [Open]. The path
and files displays in the text box.
Unit type Bin file to be used
Module AIMEX\FujiInst\Fuji\System2\Program\System\Module2.bin
10.Click [Install] and the file is installed on the item in question. After installation is
completed, a message displays.
11.Click [OK] to close the message.
12.When recovering module CPUs on twin robot modules, switch the cable to the adjacent
CPU and repeat steps 5 to 11.
15.Disconnect the cable you connected to the CPU and re-connect the original cable.

10.4.4 After recovering module CPUs

The following procedures are required.
a. Transmit the job
b. Remeasure calibration data
c. Specify module configuration settings

Note: When the CPU box is replaced, it is necessary to also register matrix data and the feeder
pallet levelness data. Refer to "6. Machine calibration data" and "12. Feeder pallet level
measurement" in "Chapter 6 Machine Accessories" in the online Accessory Software
Operation Manual.
Before proceeding with these procedures, ensure that there are no nozzles on the placing
head and no panels in the modules. Once this has been confirmed, turn on the main switch
for the machine and follow the procedures below.
1. Check the serial number for the target module.
2. Specify the module configuration settings in Accessory Software that were noted before
the procedures in this section were performed.
3. Transmit the job to the machine. If another module in the machine is currently
producing, then transmit the job to the background and then change the background job
to the foreground at the module.
4. Set the nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and then specify that the calibration data is to be
remeasured. Refer to "6.10 Remeasure Calibration Data" in the Accessory Software
Online manual for details.
5. Push START and auto-calibration is performed by the machine.

Note: Ensure that the main switch has been on and the module has been powered on for more
than 30 minutes prior to performing this step. This ensures that temperature for the parts
camera is warm.
6. If a manual final offset is required, then measure the PAM data on the machine and then
send the calculated final offset file to the machine. Refer to “9.1 On machine PAM
(Placement Accuracy Measurement)” in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference manual for
details.

10.5 MotionToolMini
This software is used display the servo counter position, update the servo parameters in
the machine, and to reset the origin positions.
10.5.1 Installing MotionToolMini

MotionToolMini must be installed on a computer before it can be used.
3. Double-click [MotionToolMini.exe] to start the installation process.
4. Click [Next].
5. Specify the location for the software to be installed if desired and then click [Next].
6. Click [Next] to begin the installation.
7. Click [Close] to complete the installation.
10.5.2 Starting MotionToolMini

1. Click [Start], point to [Programs] and then click [MTMINI]. A dialog box displays.
30SYS-0354E
2. Enter the IP address for the base to connect to in the main text box and then enter the
robot number.
Note: The number is based on the position of the robot regardless of the direction of panel flow.
1 3 1 3 1 3
Twin robot type Single robot 3 robots
2 4 4
3. Click [Connect] and the main dialog box displays.
10.5.3 Displaying servo positions

First, it is necessary to turn on the power for servos, control units, and the head.

1. Push START on the operation panel.
2. Once calibration is completed, push CYCLE STOP to stop the machine.
3. Ensure that power is being supplied to the head and servos using IO monitor (from
Equipment Check).
Continue on to display the servo positions.
1. Start MotionToolMini and connect to the module for which to display the servo positions.
2. Click [Wake] and a [Wake Setting] dialog box displays.
3. Click [OK] and an attempt to wake the servos is performed. Waking the servos takes up
a minute in some cases. Once the servos are woken, the servo positions display in
pulses.
10.5.4 Receiving a dump file via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini and connect to the robot from which to receive the dump file.
2. Click [Dump] and a [Save As] dialog box displays.
3. Specify the location and name to save the dump file as and click [Save]. The file is
acquired from the servo system and saved under the specified filename.
10.5.5 Receiving a trace file via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini and connect to the robot from which to receive the trace file.
2. Click [Trace] and a [Save As] dialog box displays.
3. Specify the location and name to save the trace file as and click [Save]. The file is
acquired from the servo system and saved under the specified filename.
10.5.6 Displaying servo details via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini and connect to the robot for which to view the details.
2. Click [Network] and the [Servo Network] dialog box displays with detailed information
about the servo system.
10.5.7 Displaying errors via MotionToolMini

1. Start MotionToolMini and connect to the module for which to view the error.
2. Click [Error] and the [Error] dialog box displays information about the error.
10.5.8 Using the MTReset function

Do not use this function unless directed by a Fuji representive. This function clears the turn
count for the absolute encoder on the motor. This can cause problems if performed
incorrectly and the module may be unusable until corrected.

10.6 TcpIpSetting
This software is used to change network settings for a base when the base is booted in
emergency mode.
NXTST0007E
The CPU is located in the location shown below.
<Base CPU>
Side 1 30SYS-0458E

Perform the following work first.
1. Prepare the media with the software. Use the media with the same version as that
already installed at the machine.
2. Turn off the main switch and remove the covers and ducts to access the front of the CPU
you wish to work on. Refer to "Replacing the Control Box" in "7. Replacing Parts" in the
AIMEX Mechanical Reference for details.
3. Prepare a cross ethernet cable. The cable must be long enough to connect the computer
to the module.
Note: Depending on the computer being used, it may also be possible to use a straight cable.

10.6.2 Procedure
3. Change the silver toggle switch to up on the item to be upgraded. This means that the
next time the item is turned on, it will boot in emergency mode.
Toggle switch
01SYS-0283E

Note: A boot-up error displays at the operation panel. Ignore this and continue with the next step.
7. Double-click [TcpIpSetting.exe].
8. Specify the new IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway in the appropriate text
boxes.
9. Then specify the host name for the machine and then enter any domain information if a
domain is used.
10.Specify the preferred and alternate DNS servers in the appropriate textboxes if these
are used.
11.Once all settings have been completed, click [Apply] and the new settings are sent to
the machine.
12.Click [Exit] to quit the software.
Toggle switch
01SYS-0283E
16.Boot the machine to enable the new network settings.

10.7 Equipment Check

This can acquire information about each unit from the specified module, check I/O states
and single action operations. This is a tool to support recovery when troubleshooting and
performing maintenance.
30SYS-0374E
10.7.1 Installing Equipment Check

1. Insert the media with the software in the drive.
2. A window about installing/upgrading is automatically displayed. If this window is not

automatically displayed, then double-click FMenu.exe on the media.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [Equipment
Check] and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and
when installation is complete, the final step is displayed.
10.7.2 Checking modules on a production line

Start Equipment Check on the computer being used to troubleshoot problems that have
occurred at a module on a production line to check the condition of the unit.
First, select the machine to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog box. Also, in the
[Select module] pane of the [Equipment check] window, and follow the steps in "10.7.4
Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors" below to check the relevant items.
30SYS-0375E
Note: Before checking tray unit-LT, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used
in production in the magazine.

10.7.3 Checking modules not on a production line

The operation of modules not on a production line such as in a maintenance room that is
not being managed by Fuji Flexa can be checked. Start Equipment Check on a computer
that is not on the line in order to check the condition of the unit.
First, specify the base IP address of the unit to be checked in the [Machine Selection] dialog
box. Also, select the module to work with in the [Select module] pane of the [Equipment
check] window, and follow the steps in "10.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors"
below to check the relevant items.
30SYS-0376E
Note: Before checking tray unit-LT, ensure that there are no tray drawers that are not to be used
in production in the magazine.
Note: Select the actual number of the robot at the machine because an image of the module does
not display.
1 3 1 3 1 3
Twin robot type Single robot 3 robots
2 4 4
10.7.4 Checking the conditions of I/Os and sensors

<For conveyors>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Conveyor sensor status] from the [Menu] pane.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push
START and the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to
stop the machine.
4. Click [Start] and the condition of the sensors is displayed.

<For tray unit-LTs>

1. Select [Adjustment mode start] from the [Menu] pane.
Note: If the module is already in adjustment mode, then this command is not necessary.
2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LT/LTC/LTW] - [I/O status check] from the [Menu] pane.
3. Click [Start] and the condition of the I/Os is displayed.
4. When you have completed checking the I/Os, click [Adjustment mode end] from the
[Menu] pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.
<For base, module>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane.
2. I/O monitor displays.
30SYS-0383E
a. [Input signal]
• A green indicator means the input is on and a white indicator means the input is
off.
b. [Output signal]
• A green indicator means the output is on and a white indicator means the output
is off. If the [Output signal] option is checked, the selected module item is locked
and it is possible to change the output signal status.
c. [Ring] settings
• [Ring] is used to enable a sound when an input is on. Select the item for which
you want to enable the sound and then click [Ring].
d. [ON/OFF]
• [ON/OFF] is used to change the status of an output. Select the output you wish
to change and click [ON/OFF] to change the output status.

10.7.5 Checking the operation of units

<Conveyors>
1. Select [Operation] - [Conveyor] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then select
the operation item.
2. In the [Selected lane] group box, select the check boxes for the lanes to check.
3. If START has not been pushed once since the machine has been turned on, then push
START and the unit checks for the presence of panels. Then push CYCLE STOP to
stop the machine.
4. Click [Start]. Refer to the section "10.7.8 Conveyor command list" in this manual for
details about the actions.
<Tray unit-LTs>
2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LT] - [Operation type] from the [Menu] pane and then
select the operation item.
3. Click [Start]. Refer to the section "10.7.6 Checking the tray unit-LT calibration values"
in this manual for details about the actions.
4. When you have completed checking the operation, click [Adjustment mode end] from
the [Menu] pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.
<For bases, modules>

1. Select [I/O monitor] - [Base] or [Module] from the [Menu] pane and then select each item.
2. Select the [Output signal] check box.
3. Select the output item from the list.
4. Click [ON/OFF].
10.7.6 Checking the tray unit-LT calibration values

2. Select [Operation] - [Tray unit-LT/LTC/LTW] - [Calibration data] from the [Menu] pane
and then select the item you wish to set.
3. Click [Start]. Refer to sections "10.7.7 Tray unit-LT command list" for details about each
item.
4. When you have completed checking values, click [Adjustment mode end] from the
[Menu] pane and the module returns to normal operation mode.

10.7.7 Tray unit-LT command list
Command Name
Description
(Acquire information)
Unit information Used to check the [Serial no.] and [Firmware version].
Servo counter Used to check the current servo counter value.
(Not updated in real time.)
I/O status check Used to check the current I/O status.
(Not updated in real time.)
RFID reading results Displays the drawer ID (FIDL) for all subslots. (Currently not
supported)
• In order to read RFIDs, it is necessary for both the
machine and tray unit-LT to support RFIDs.
Command Name
(Operation check) Description
Retract position Stores the drawer in the magazine and moves the TZ-axes to the
retract positions.
• If there is no job that is using a tray unit-LT, operation
may not be possible.
Reject parts conveyor Used to check the reject parts conveyor operation. Specify the
distance to move the conveyor (parts). (Range: 1 - 200 mm)
Specified slot pickup Used to check the operation that moves the tray drawer for the
position specified slot to the pickup position.
• A job using a tray unit-LT is required. Only slots used
in the job can be used.
• Perform after running the verify command.
Single action positioning Used to check the following TZ- and TY-axis operations.
a. Advance the shuttle for the current slot position
b. Move the magazine to the specified slot position
c. Advance the shuttle for the current slot position
d. Store the shuttle
e. Move shuttle continuously back and forward
f. Move magazines continuously up and down (includes
linked magazines)
• A job using a tray unit-LT is required for "Advance the
shuttle for the current slot position".
• Perform these checks after running the verify
command.
Movement to level Move magazine B to the position for placing the spirit level when
adjustment position performing level adjustment.
Verify Used to perform verification and check the results.
• A job using a tray unit-LT is required. Only slots used
in the job can be used.

Command Name
(Calibration data Description
related)
Calibration data check Used to check the current calibration data.
TZ-axis origin setting Used to set the TZ-axis origin. (Currently not supported)
TY-axis origin setting Used to set the TY-axis origin. (Currently not supported)
Calibration data setting Used to set calibration data for the specified table number.
• When entering calibration data, the units used
are um but these values are converted into
pulses internally. When checking calibration
data, there are cases of conversion deviations
occurring.
Tray height check Used to measure the attachment height of the tray height
sensor measurement check sensor for the specified magazine. (Currently not
supported)
• Special jigs are required to measure this setting.
Serial number setting Used to specify the serial number.

10.7.8 Conveyor command list

Command Name
Description
(Status check)
Conveyor sensor Used to check the status of the following conveyor sensors.
status 1. Conveyor panel pass check sensor L
2. Conveyor panel pass check sensor R
3. Panel unclamp check sensor
4. Conveyor back-up pin detection sensor
• A check cannot be performed if automatic operation has not been
commenced even once after booting up the machine. Clear all
panels by using the machine manual commands.
Command Name
Description
(Operation check)
Clamp Used to check the clamp operation for the specified lane.
• The clamp operation cannot be performed with the module pulled
out.
Unclamp Used to check the unclamp operation for the specified lane.
• The unclamp operation cannot be performed with the module
pulled out.
Rail Used to check the specified rail movement. Specify the rail to be
checked and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.
Panel conveyance Used to check the panel conveyance operation for the specified lane.
Specify the lane to be checked and the movement distance.
• A check can be performed with the module pulled out.
Continuous clamp The clamp at the specified lane can be moved up and down repeatedly
operation between 1 and 1,000,000 times.
• Push EMERGENCY STOP at the machine if you want to stop the
continuous clamping operation.
Command Name
Description
(Adjusting)
Panel pass sensor Used to adjust the sensitivity of the panel pass sensors.
sensitivity
adjustment

10.7.9 Single action positioning operations

When checking the shuttle operation
Operation mode Description

name
Advance the shuttle [Actions]
for the current slot
position Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position for the current slot position.
• The offset TY minus value is toward the operator.
• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the
positional relationship with the TZ-axis.
Move shuttle [Actions]
continuously back
and forward Moves the shuttle continuously to and from the advance and retract ends
for the current slot position.
• An error will occur if the shuttle is unable to move due to the
positional relationship with the TZ-axis.
When checking the magazine operation

name
Move the magazine [Actions]
to the specified slot
position Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to
the positional relationship with the TY-axis.
Move magazine [Actions]
continuously up and
down Moves the magazine continuously to and from the upper and lower ends.
• For tray unit-LTs, operation can be performed with magazines
A & B linked together.
• An error will occur if the magazine is unable to move due to
the positional relationship with the TY-axis.
When simultaneously checking the shuttle and magazine operation

name
Advance the shuttle [Actions]
for the specified slot
position 1. Moves the magazine to the specified slot position.
2. Advances the shuttle to the offset TY position.
When storing the advanced tray drawer in the magazine
Operation mode
Description
name
Store the shuttle [Actions]
Stores the advanced shuttle in the magazine.
• The slot that was pulled out is the slot the tray drawer is
stored in.

10.7.10 Checking unit configuration

[Equipment check] can be used during production to check items such as information about
nozzles set on modules, the serial number of each unit, and firmware versions.
Checking the nozzle station and condition of nozzles in modules

1. Select the applicable module from the [Machine Selection] dialog box.
30SYS-0377E
2. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Nozzle information] from the [Menu] pane.
3. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane. [Nozzle unit information]
displays.
30SYS-0378E
a. The following information can be checked here.
• Nozzle station information: unit type, serial number
• Nozzle information: unit type (and serial number), usage condition for current
job.
b. Nozzles not being used in the current job are colored gray.
c. For nozzles without registered specification data, only the serial number is displayed.

Checking items such as feeder pallet, feeder, and tray unit versions
30SYS-0377E
2. Select the desired module from the [Select module] pane.
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Device information] from the [Menu] pane. [Device unit
information] displays.
30SYS-0379E
• Feeder pallet information: version

• Feeder information: feeder ID, serial number, version
• Tray unit-LT information: serial number, version
• Tray unit-M information: serial number, version

Checking items such as module, head, and camera versions

30SYS-0377E
3. Select [Unit Configuration] - [Other unit information] from the [Menu] pane. [Another unit
information] displays.
30SYS-0380E
• Module information: unit type, serial number, version

• Head information: position, unit type, serial number, version
• Conveyor information: unit type, serial number, bank, I/F board version
• Camera information: unit type, serial number, version
• Pressure calibration unit information: version, correction value, filter frequency

Refreshing unit information

Use the following procedure to refresh the unit information being displayed.
2. Click [Refresh]. [Device information], [Nozzle information], and [Other unit information]
for the selected module are all refreshed.
30SYS-0381E
Exporting unit information to a text file

Unit information can be exported to a text file. Use the following procedure to do this.
2. Click [Export] and specify the directory where to save the file. All the information for the
selected module is saved to a text file.
30SYS-0382E

10.8 MEdit
This software is used to perform basic editing of job data and testing of panel/board skip
marks. This is capable of acquiring the job on the machine and sending the edited data
back to the machine as well as saving the changes to the global directory.
Refer to "5. Editing Jobs on the Machine (MEdit)" in the AIMEX series Programming Manual
for details regarding MEdit.

10.9 IPS Viewer

This software is used to display on computers the images and results taken by the IPS
(Intelligent Parts Sensor) system on heads equipped with the parts side view recognition
function (such as the V12 head).
01NST-0430
10.9.1 Installing IPS Viewer

IPS Viewer is on the system media.
1. Insert the media disk into the drive of the computer on which you want to install the
software.
2. The [Welcome to Software Installation] window automatically displays. If this window

does not automatically display, double-click FMenu.exe on the media.
4. In the step for selecting the components to install, select the check box for [IPS Viewer]
and then click [Next]. Follow the steps of the installer to install the software and when
installation is complete, the final step is displayed.
01NST-0431

10.9.2 IPS Viewer Window Elements

The IPS Viewer window is comprised of elements like the one shown below.
Menu bar
Toolbar
IPS Image pane Properties pane
Menu bar: All operations, such as opening files and selecting the display area,
can be performed by using the menu bar.
Toolbar: Frequently used commands contained in the menu bar can be accessed
directly from the toolbar.
IPS image pane: Images captured by the IPS and the measurement results
display in this pane.
Properties pane: Items such as measurement results and parameters for
measurement timing display in this pane. 01NST-0432E
10.9.3 Basic IPS Viewer Operation

It is necessary to acquire the IPS image from the machine before using the software. Use
one of the following methods to acquire the IPS image file from the machine by using
Accessory Software.
• Acquiring a file using the error image analysis function in Accessory Software.
By specifying acquisition of images by slot in advance, the IPS will determine
the error type and automatically send the image to Accessory Software.
• Acquire from the machine trace data. It is possible to acquire the last captured
IPS image together with the trace data.
Note: For details on these methods, refer to the Accessory Software Operation Manual chapter
2, section "5. Vision processing error analysis" and chapter 6, section "4. Acquiring machine
trace data"
Opening an IPS file

Use one of the methods below to open an IPS file after starting IPS Viewer.
• Drag-and-drop the desired IPS file into the IPS Viewer window.
• Select [Open File] from the [File] menu the open file button on the toolbar, and
specify the desired IPS file in the [Open File] dialog box.

Displaying nozzle measurement results

There are three types of IPS images IPS1 to IPS3. The displayed contents for each image
type differ.
IPS1 IPS2 IPS3
Image for a single nozzle Image for 2 nozzles Image for 4 nozzles
01NST-0433E
From these IPS images, select the desired area to display the measurement results for the
applicable nozzle. To select an area, select one of the area numbers from the toolbar.
Area number
Area
01NST-0434E
The images below illustrate the relationship between the area number and the position of
the nozzle inside the IPS image. IPS1 is fixed at area number 1.
IPS2 IPS3
Area number 3 2 2 3 4 1
Area
01NST-0435E

Enlarging and reducing IPS images

It is possible to enlarge or reduce the image displayed in the IPS image pane by using
buttons on the toolbar or commands from the menu bar.
Change the display size
When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

Zoom In magnification of the image is increased. It is also possible to drag
the cursor to specify the area of the image that is to be magnified.
Right-click to reduce the magnification of the image.
When this command is active and the image is clicked, the

Zoom Out magnification of the image is reduced.
Right-click to increase the magnification of the image.
Select this command to resize the image to fit the size of the
Fit window.
When this is selected, the zoom in/out operation mode is cleared.
Normal Click this to clear the zoom in/out operation mode.
01NST-0436E

10.9.4 Reading the Displayed Results

It is possible to check the results of the following items in IPS Viewer.
• Dropped part check

• Parts release check
• Tombstoned check
• Part height check
• Upside-down part check
• Nozzle check
• Nozzle position check
The result type contained in the IPS file can be identified in based on the information
displayed in [Process type] in the IPS Viewer properties pane.
Process type
Image acquisition time Before placement
Displays the timing of the measurement After placement
After nozzle changeover
Nozzle presence
After pickup
After dip
If other items display, refer to the IPS

Viewer instruction manual on the
system DVD for details.
Check details Part presence

Displays the type of measurement Part height
Measure part height
Nozzle reference position
Nozzle position check (*1)
(*1) There are cases of settings like the following being displayed
for Part presence, Part height, Measure part height.
Part presence + Part height
When this is displayed, the results for these two types of
checks are being displayed at the same time.
01NST-0437E

Dropped part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the dropped part check result
is displayed.
a. Image acquisition time
• After pickup, After dip, Before placement
b. Check details
• Part presence
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, and part detection lines are
displayed.
Example good result Example error result

(Part exists in measurement area) (No part exists in measurement area)
Measurement area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0438E
Items in the properties pane

The meanings of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.
Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
(*1) Feeder ID Displays the slot from which the measured part was picked.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
Detection position Displays the numerical value for the part detection line.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version
IPS software version Displays the IPS firmware version.
File version Displays the IPS file version.
Software version Displays the IPS version for the machine application.
Note: If the file version is 1, the items with the (*1) mark are not displayed. 01NST-0439E

Parts release check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the parts release check result
is displayed.
a. Image acquisiton time
• After placement
b. Check details
• Part presence
Displayed items
displayed.

(No part exists in measurement area) (Part exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0440E

Generic
(*1)
Head number Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement was
performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle position
for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Threshold value Displays the threshold value for determining whether or not a
part is present.
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there is an
error result, the related error code displays.
Version

Tombstoned check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the tombstoned part check
result is displayed.
• After pickup, Before placement
b. Check deatils
• Part height
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area, nozzle position, part detection, and tolerance
lines are displayed.

(Part exists within tolerance lines) (Part not within tolerance lines)
Measurement area
Nozzle position
Upper tolerance
line
Part detection line
(bottom of part)
Lower tolerance
line
01NST-0441E

Generic
Head number
(*1) Displays the head number (1, 2) for which the measurement
was performed.
(*1) Holder ID Displays the holder ID (A-L) corresponding with the nozzle
position for which the measurement was performed.
Measurement result
(*1) Result If the result is good, then "OK" is displayed, and if there
is an error result, the related error code displays.
Tolerance
Upper Displays the numerical value for the upper tolerance line.
Lower Displays the numerical value for the lower tolerance line.
Version

Part height check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part height check result is
displayed.
• After pickup
b. Check details
• Measure part height
Displayed items
displayed.

Measurement area
Nozzle position
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0438E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

Upside-down part check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the part height check result is
displayed.
• After pickup
b. Check details
• Upper-down check
Displayed items
displayed.

Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Lead detection
line
Part detection line

(bottom of part)
01NST-0447E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Lead detection position Displays the numerical value for the detected position
for the lead ends.
Part and lead difference Displays the numerical value for the difference between
the part bottom surface and the lowest point for the lead ends.
Version

Nozzle check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle check result is
displayed.
• After nozzle changeover
b. Check details
• Nozzle reference position
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.

(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle tip
position
01NST-0444E

Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

Nozzle position check results

When the process type in the properties pane is as follows, the nozzle position check result
is displayed.
• Nozzle presence
b. Check details
• Nozzle position check
Displayed items
In the results image, the measurement area and nozzle position line are displayed.
Check for nozzle in upper position

(Nozzle exists in measurement area) (No nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
Check for nozzle in lower position

(No nozzle exists in measurement area) (Nozzle exists in measurement area)
Measurement
area
Nozzle position
01NST-0446E


The meaning of the items displayed in the properties pane are provided below.
Generic
Head number
was performed.
Measurement result
Version

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 11. Upgrading Software
11. Upgrading Software

This section explains how to upgrade the machine control software as well as the software
for the different units.
11.1 Upgrading Machine Control Software

When upgrading the machine control software, there are two methods.
a. Use Accessory Software to upgrade AIMEXs whenever possible. When Accessory

Software is used, all of the bases that make up a AIMEX “machine” in Fuji Flexa are
upgraded at the same time and module configuration settings are retained.
b. When using VersionUp to upgrade the machine control software, the upgrade
process has to be repeated for each individual base and the module configuration
settings are reset back to the default settings.
11.1.1 Using Accessory Software

Before this function can be used, the AIMEX machine control software must first be
installed on the computer on which Accessory Software is installed.
1. Ensure that all of the AIMEX machines to be upgraded are turned on and that the
modules not producing or performing any special processing.
2. Push MANUAL on the module to load the software. The manual mode screen displays.
3. If nozzles are on the head, return the nozzles back to the nozzle station by following the
substeps below.
a. Use the arrow keys to select the unit exchange pictogram and then push OK.
b. Push the up arrow key once to select the eject nozzle pictogram.
c. Push START and the nozzles are ejected from the head.
d. Push CANCEL when the guidance screen displays the step for removing the feeder
pallet. It is not necessary to remove the feeder pallet.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0944

11. Upgrading Software SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
6. Ensure that the following pictogram is displayed on the operation panel.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0945
7. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.
8. From Floor Monitor, click the AIMEX machine for which to upgrade. The Machine
Accessories log on page is displayed.
9. Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
30SYS-0344E
10.Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the
machine accessories page is displayed with the selected machine already selected.
30SYS-0345E
11.Click [Remote operation]

12.Click [Machine Application Installation].
42SYS-0152-E
13.Select the new version and click [Start updating] to start the installation process.
14.After installation is completed, turn off the main switches for the AIMEX.
Caution: Turn off the main switch to the base directly while the following screen is still displayed
without placing the module in sleep mode or any other such action.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0945
15.Restart the AIMEX. A confirmation messages asking if the module should be upgraded
is displayed on the operation panel at each module.
16.Push OK to upgrade the software on the modules.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0946
Note: Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.
17.After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the AIMEX.
Note: After upgrading, ensure that the specified machine and module configuration settings are
correct.

11.1.2 Using VersionUp from the AIMEX Tools

This software is used to change the current machine version on the base and attached
modules to the version on the DVD. The current IP address of the base to upgrade must
be known. This can be performed from any computer that can connect to the AIMEX over
the network and has a DVD drive.
Be sure to record any module configuration settings for the module before performing any
of the steps below because it is necessary to specify these settings again after upgrading.
1. Ensure that all of the bases for the AIMEX to be upgraded are turned on and that the
modules are not producing or performing any special processing.
substeps below.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0944
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0945

7. Insert the AIMEX software DVD (CD-ROM disc1) into the disk drive and open the drive
for the DVD (CD-ROM disc1) through Explorer.
8. Double-click [AIMEX] to open that folder.

Note: Open the [AIMEX] folder beneath the [disc1] folder on the DVD, and the [AIMEX] folder
directly beneath the drive on CD-ROM disc1.
9. Double-click VersionUp.exe to start the software.
NXTST0003E
10.In the [Operator] text box, enter some text.
11.Enter the IP address of the base for which to upgrade in the [Host name] text box and
then click [OK].
12.If the target machine is found, a dialog box displays with the current version in the
machine and the new version. If the upgrade process should continue, click [OK]. A
dialog box displays with the upgrade progress.
13.Once all of the files have been copied, a message box displays. Click [OK] to close the
message.
14.Turn off the main switches for the AIMEX.

Caution: Turn off the main switch to the base directly while the following screen is still displayed
without placing the module in sleep mode or any other such action.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0945
15.Restart the AIMEX. A confirmation messages asking if the module should be upgraded
is displayed on the operation panel at each module.

16.Push OK to upgrade the software on the modules.
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0946
Note: Do not turn off the power to the machine while it is being upgraded.
17.After all of the modules have been upgraded, restart the AIMEX.
18.Use Accessory Software to specify the appropriate settings for all of the machine and
module configuration settings.

11.2 Upgrading Unit Software

This command is used to upgrade the software for units such as heads, feeders, and feeder
pallets. The unit to be upgraded must be loaded on a module to perform the upgrade.
Note: For the method of upgrading feeder pallets, refer to "Feeder Pallet & Tape Feeder Upgrade
Procedures" for details. (This manual is stored on the system DVD)
1. Install the software for the units on the computer that has the Accessory Software server
installed.
2. Ensure that all of the bases for the AIMEX to be upgraded are turned on and that the
modules are not producing or performing any special processing.
substeps below.
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0944
1 2
ENABLE LOCK
30SYS-0945

8. Start Accessory Software and display the Floor Monitor page.
9. From Floor Monitor, click the AIMEX machine for which to upgrade. The Machine
Accessories log on page is displayed.
10.Enter or select a user ID from the drop-down list.
30SYS-0344E
11.Enter the password for the user and click [Log on]. If the log on is successful, the
machine accessories page is displayed with the selected machine already selected.
30SYS-0345E
12.Select the modules to upgrade and then click [Remote operation]
13.Click [Update software].
14.Check [Various unit software].
15.Then click [Start updating]. Accessory Software copies the software and automatically
reboots the machine when completed.

16.After rebooting, the screen for selecting the units to upgrade is displayed. Select the unit
you want to upgrade using the arrow keys on the operation panel and then push OK.
Unit selection
Update all units Feeder selection 30SYS-0356E
Note: To upgrade all units, select [Execute of All].
17.Push START to begin the update.

MEMO:

SYS-AIMEX-9.0E 12. Troubleshooting
12. Troubleshooting
This chapter explains basic procedures for troubleshooting the machine and a list of
common issues encountered. Use this chapter to identify and resolve minor problems to
restore the machine to its proper condition.
Contact your Fuji representative for serious problems or repairs that cannot be performed.
12.1 Troubleshooting Points

Follow the points below to help speed up the troubleshooting process.
• Read the error messages.

Note: Write down any codes so if contacting your Fuji representative is required, the error
message codes can be included.
• Use the instructions that display on the operation panel to help resolve most
issues.
Note: Be sure to follow the on screen steps in order. There are some points that OK must be
pushed. If OK is not pushed or pushed out of order then the procedures on the operation
panel may not advance, or show the wrong steps.
• Check the most basic items first.
• Start with the most plausible cause.
• Check step by step while eliminating possible causes.
12.2 Checking Error Codes

In Accessory Software, click the "Error Stop" text that displays in Floor Monitor for the
applicable machine. Information related to the error is displayed.
2
1
30SYS-0373aE
In addition, it is possible to check the error information by conducting a search for the error
codes displayed in the operation panel by following the procedures below.
1. In Floor Monitor, click [Error Search] from [Menu] and the page changes to display the
error code search page.
2. Enter the error code that displays on the operation panel in the text box for [Error Code]
and click [Search]. The specified error code is searched for and if located, the page
changes to display the information.
3. To conduct another search, enter the new error code in the text box and click [Search].
To view any additional details about the error, click [Details] if it is available.

12. Troubleshooting SYS-AIMEX-9.0E
12.3 Troubleshooting Common Issues

12.3.1 Mark vision processing errors
Restart the reading process and change the operation panel to display the vision
processing images by pushing MONITOR. Check the following points when the mark with
the error is displayed.
Point Description/Countermeasure
Is the mark present? If the mark is not present that can indicate that the mark position
in the job is incorrect or possibly that the panel was loaded
incorrectly. Remove the panel and ensure that it was loaded
correctly.
Check the position of the mark and then check the position of the
mark in the job and correct if necessary.
If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, use the panel
stopping position correction function.
Is the mark clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the mark and that the mark is
clearly visible. Remove any items covering the mark. This is
especially common for marks read during calibration due to the
retractable reference conveyor tops.
If the mark is not clearly visible, check the lighting of the mark
camera. If out of focus, check to ensure the panel is clamped.
If the panel is clamped and the mark is still out of focus or too
dark, replace the mark camera and lighting and try again.
Is the mark within the This outer box represents the scan area. If the mark is outside
outer green box? of the scan area, it cannot be found even if it is perfectly clear.
The scan area should be at least 1.5 times larger than the entire
mark. If it is not, open the job and change the read area.
Does the shape of The green outline indicates the shape of the mark in the job. If
the mark match the the mark is a different shape than the one expected, the mark will
green outline? not be found.
Change the shape for the mark data in the job.
Is the mark the same The green outline represents not only the shape but also the size
size as the green expected. If the mark is larger or smaller than specified in the
outline? job, it cannot be found.
Check the mark size on the panel and change the mark data size
to be appropriate in the job.
Is the mark very If the mark is too bright or too dark, the system cannot locate the
bright or very dark? mark. Change the fiducial mark read brightness setting in the
machine configuration.
Start the Accessory Software client, and then click the name of
the machine in floor monitor.
Log on and then select [Machine Configuration]. Select the
[FMark setting] from the catagory drop-down list. Change the
[Fiducial mark reading brightness setting]. If the mark is too
bright, select the [Less] option. If the mark is too dark, select the
[More] setting.
After making the setting, click [Send to machine] to enable the
changes.
These points and countermeasures cover most of the common mark read error causes.

12.3.2 Part vision processing errors

If vision processing errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot
the error.
1. If the machine is still running, push MONITOR to display the vision monitor. Ensure that
the part was picked and displays on the monitor. Push MONITOR again to close the
vision monitor.
2. Read the error message for the error code.
3. Stop the module.
4. Acquire the error image from the module though Accessory Software.
5. Open the image in Image Viewer and check the vision processing results. Check the
following points when the part with the error is displayed.
Is the part present? If the part is not present, that indicates a pick up error of some
kind.
Check the condition of the feeder and ensure that parts are
being supplied. Ensure that the correct size of nozzle is used.
Is the part clear? Ensure that nothing is covering the part and that the part is
clearly visible. Remove any items that are possibly obscuring
the view such as parts on the glass covers for the frontlighting
unit.
If the part is not clearly visible, check the lighting and ensure that
the correct type of frontlighting is used for the part.
If the part is out of focus or too dark with the correct lighting
being used, replace the part camera unit and try again.
Does the direction of The green outline indicates the orientation of the part based on
the part match the the data in the job.
green outline? If the part is rotated, then that indicates that the direction setting
in the part data does not match the packaging direction. Check
the direction that the part is being supplied in the packaging
compared to the setting in the part data.
If different, then correct the direction setting in the part data for
the job.
Does the shape/size The green outline indicates the shape/size of the part. If the part
of the part match the is a different shape or size then that indicates that the wrong part
green outline? is present or that the part data is incorrect. Ensure that the part
is correct. If the part is correct, then edit the part data in the job
for that part to match the actual part.
Does the part match There are several possible causes for this problem. Generally,
the green outline but the problem is with the pickup tolerance, wrong vision type, or
the green outline was wrong p_pattern (usually coarse positioning cannot be
not moved to cover performed for errors).
the part? Check the shape data in the job for the part and ensure that
these settings are correct.
Does the green First, ensure that the part is a good part (e.g., no bent/missing
outline cover the part leads). Check the error message for details. Check the
but errors still occur? positioning of the elements to ensure that they are specified
correctly.
Check the tolerances in the shape data.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common part vision error causes.

12.3.3 Pickup errors

If pickup errors occur for a part, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the error.
1. Stop the module.
2. Check the following points.
Is the cover tape being Check the condition of the cover tape take up. If the cover
taken up? tape is not taken up properly then it might cover the part thus
preventing it from being picked.
Ensure that the cover tape is being peeled back as the

feeder advances.
Ensure that the cover tape take up path is correct and there
is more then 10 cm of cover tape extending from the bottom
of the feeder. If any problems are found, then correct them
and try pickup again.
Does the feeder Check the advancing of the feeder. When it is advancing,
advance smoothly? does the red error LED ever come on? If it does that
Are there any problems indicates a problem with the advancing of the feeder. Ensure
with the condition of the that the green power light comes on and that the feed pitch is
feeder? correct.
Clean the sprocket area and ensure no parts are stuck under
the tape leaf area.
If there is a problem with the feeder, put the parts on another
feeder and perform maintenance on the current feeder to
correct the problem.
Is the nozzle size being Check the size of the nozzle being used for the part. Ensure
used for the part good? that the nozzle is not too big or too small for the part.
Ensure that the part has a flat smooth surface in the area
where the nozzle picks at least the size of the nozzle.
If the nozzle size needs to be changed, open the job in MEdit
and correct the nozzle data in the shape data (part data) for
the part in question. Try pickup again after resending the
data to the machine.
If the nozzle size is good but the part still has trouble being
picked by that nozzle, try changing the soft pick speed in the
shape data to pick up the part slower.
If this does not work, try the procedures for the next item.
Is the pickup position Use the job test command from Manual Mode to check the
good? pickup position for the part. Is the pickup position at the
center of the desired pickup point (usually the center of the
body)?
- If the packaging is the cause of the error (such as the

cavity in the tape is shifted), specify a device offset at the
machine using manual mode commands.
- If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and change the
pickup point offset in the shape data for the part in question.
Try pickup again after resending the data to the machine.

Is the pickup height Check the pickup offset Z height for the part in question and
good? then check the actual pickup height for the part in the feeder.
Is the pickup offset Z good?

If it is not correct, open the job in MEdit and correct the
pickup offset Z (tray, if for tray parts) in the shape data (part
data) for the part in question. Try pickup again after
resending the data to the machine.
If it is very close to the correct height, try changing this offset

to just be a little lower and then try again. (Do no lower too
much or part/nozzle damage may occur.)
If the pickup offset Z is good, check the levelness of the

feeder pallet and send any necessary adjustments to the
module.
What is the condition of Check the condition of the nozzle being used for the part.
the nozzle? Is the nozzle broken?
Check to ensure that he nozzle is not cracked or chipped. Is

the spring back motion for the nozzle smooth? If it is not,
remove the nozzle and check the nozzle and holder for
problems and correct as necessary.
Is the nozzle clogged? Clean the inside of the nozzle to

remove any items that might be blocking the vacuum.
Try using a different nozzle that is the same size if no
problems are found.
What is the condition of Ensure that the vacuum is sufficient in the base and the
the vacuum? module.
Check the nozzle vacuum filter in the head for clogging for
the nozzle in question. If it is dirty, clean it and if it cannot be
cleaned, replace it.
Ensure that there is no leak between the head and the XY-
robot head connection point.
If using a multiple holder head and all parts that are picked by
holders after the first few parts have pickup problems, then
that might indicate a vacuum leak problem between the
holders and the vacuum pump.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common pickup error causes.

12.3.4 Poor placing accuracy

If poor placing accuracy occurs, check the points below.
Is the placing accuracy Use the simulation test command from MEdit to check the
problem just for one placement position for that sequence.
point on the panel (other
parts with the same part If the placement position is not good, adjust the position in
number have good MEdit and transmit the changes back to the machine.
placements)?
Is the placing accuracy This could be due to a part data problem with this part
problem for all parts with number. Check the following items.
the same part number?
Ensure that the nozzle size is appropriate for the specified
transport speed.
Ensure that the part height setting is correct. Incorrect

settings can mean that parts are being dropped or pushed
in the panel, which will cause placing problems.
Ensure that there are no placement offsets specified in the

shape data. If a offset is specified, the part is placed using
that offset.
Check the vision type and element data settings to ensure

that misalignments are not due to data errors here or
incorrect processing.
Check the panel thickness and pallet thickness settings to

ensure that they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually

multiple parts will have problems.
If no problems with the above data are located, try slowing

down the transport speed and the soft place speed.
Is the placing accuracy Is the nozzle size correct for these parts? If the nozzle size
problem for all parts is correct, replace the nozzle and check the old nozzle for
using the same nozzle? the following points.
Ensure that the nozzle is not cracked/chipped.

Ensure that the nozzle is not clogged.
Ensure that the spring back motion for multiple holder
nozzles is smooth.
Ensure that no items have adhered to the tip of the nozzle
(such as cover tape adhesive). If the problem still persists
after nozzle replacement, check the mechanical vacuum
break action for the nozzle in question for multiple nozzle
heads. Check the solenoid for the H01 and H02(F) head.
Is the placing accuracy If board fiducials are not being used for each board, then
problem for all parts for a this might indicate a panel circuit production problem or that
board with all parts the board position in the job is incorrect.
shifted the same way but Ensure that the board positioning in the job is correct.
the placing accuracy for Change the job to use board fiducials to compensate for
the other boards on the board misalignment if possible. If not, alter the board
panel good? positioning in the direction of the shift to improve accuracy.

Is the placing accuracy This can indicate a problem with a module.

problem for all parts for Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that
all boards on the panel when the panel is clamped that it is flat (and there is no
from a module? natural bowing of the panel).
Perform auto calibration on the module in question (jig
nozzles are required for this).
If the accuracy is still not good, then perform PAM on the
module in question.
Is the placing accuracy Check the positioning of the backup pins and ensure that
problem for all/most when the panel is clamped that it is flat (and there is no
parts for all boards on natural bowing of the panel).
the panel for all If the parts are all shifted in the same direction and board
modules? fiducials are not being used, this can indicate a panel
fiducial to board placement misalignment.
Check the positioning in the job compared to the actual

placements and fiducials.

ensure that they are correct.
If there is a problem with these settings, then usually
multiple parts will have problems.
Check the levelness of the machine.

Perform auto calibration on the modules (jig nozzles are
required for this). If the accuracy is still not good, then
perform PAM on the module in question.
How is the printing Check the condition of the solder after the panel comes
condition? from the printing machine before it enters the AIMEX.
Is the printing good with sufficient solder?
Solder printing conditions or dryness can cause part
deviations during panel conveyance, or can affect the self-
alignment during reflow.
Solder adhesion weakens when the solder dries.

Therefore, the sooner the placement occurs after printing,
the better.
Is the part placement Check the reflow temperature profile. Improper reflow
good at the machine but conditions can cause self-alignment problems and
poor after reflow? tombstoning.
Provide a profile in which the temperature is increased
evenly over the entire panel.
If the solder melting speed differs from point to point, parts
are pulled toward the solder that melts first.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the common poor placing accuracy
causes.

12.3.5 Panel conveyance errors

If panel conveyance errors occur, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the
error.
1. Read the error message for the error code.
2. Stop the module.
Is the error that a panel Check the condition of the panel left and right sensors on the
is entering or exiting the conveyor.
module but it never If there is no panel currently blocking one of these sensors
moves even though the but the sensor amplifier mistakenly says there is a panel,
panel actually does that can be the cause of the problem.
move?
Refer to Sensitivity Adjustment for the Conveyor Panel Pass
Sensor in Chapter 9 of the AIMEX Mechanical Reference
Manual for procedures on adjusting these sensors.
Is the panel stopping in If the panel is not stopping in the correct position, ensure
the correct position? that the conveyor belts are clean and have no items such as
grease on them.
Ensure that the panel is not slipping on the belts due to it

being too heavy or having some thing like grease on it.
If neither the belt nor the panel is dirty, check that [Timing
pulley] is specified for the [Conveyor pulley type] setting in
[Module Configuration] - [Conveyor pulley settings] of
Accessory Software.
These points and countermeasures cover some of the panel conveyance error causes.

12.3.6 If there are missing parts

If there are missing parts on the panel, follow the procedures below to help troubleshoot the
error.
1. Ensure that the parts are being used during production and that there are no pick errors.
2. Ensure that a skip setting for that part has not been specified in Fuji Flexa or in MEdit.
3. Check the condition of the part after the panel is completed in the module.
Was pickup attempted and Use the pickup troubleshooting procedures to correct the
pickup errors occurred? pickup error.
Is the part picked but Clean the nozzle and ensure that no foreign items have
remains on the nozzle adhered to the nozzle to cause the part to remain on the
after placement? nozzle after placement.
Ensure that the spring back motion of the nozzle is
smooth. If the nozzle remains stuck in the up position,
then placement might not occur correctly.
Check for any placement height offsets in the part data

and correct as needed.

ensure that they are correct. If there is a problem with
these settings, then usually multiple parts will have
problems.
Has the part been skipped If the device skip function has been set in MEdit,
in MEdit using the device production continuing without placing the part is normal.
skip function (no pickup If this part must be placed, then do not use this function.
and placement is
attempted)? If this function is not used, then production cannot be
continued until that part is supplied and placed (for
example if parts run out during production).
Has the part been skipped This setting must be manually set and should only be
in Fuji Flexa? done when necessary.
If the part has been skipped in Fuji Flexa, then production

is being performed as specified.
If the part needs to be placed, then remove the skip

setting in the job, optimize, wait until all current panels in
the machine have been unloaded and then send the
modified job to the machine and restart production.
Is the part being placed by Check for interference between the part and machines
the module but not on the after the placing module.
panels before the reflow
oven? Ensure that the part is not too high for the heads following
the placing module (for example, if a placing head
following the placing module is an H12HS, then the max.
height for parts placed before the H12HS module is 3.0
mm).
These points and countermeasures cover some of the missing parts causes.

12.3.7 Panel detection error between modules

If a panel was detected between modules but there is no panel.
The right and left conveyor sensors also check to ensure that there are no panels between
the modules when they are unclamped. If there is no panel but this error still occurs, adjust
the conveyor sensor that is falsely activated. For procedures on adjusting these sensors,
refer to the AIMEX Mechanical Reference.
12.3.8 An encoder backup error occurs

If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on the module (not on a head).
The individual batteries in the encoder lines for each axis maintain the encoder memory for
that axis. If the encoder cable is disconnected from the motor or the battery is disconnected
when there is no power being supplied to the encoder from the machine, the encoder
memory is lost. If the encoder memory is lost for some reason, an encoder backup error
occurs. Perform the following steps if this occurs for an axis on the module (not an axis on
the head). Only perform the following steps if a Fuji representative has trained you on how
to perform them. If you have not been trained on how to perform the following steps,
contact your Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for that axis. If it is already connected and the encoder cable for this
axis was not disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good or
not, replace the battery with a new one.
2. Move the axis gently by hand to the correct position for that axis to reset the origin
positioning.
3. Perform a MT Reset.
4. Restart the machine and the error should be cleared and the machine can be used for
production. If it has not been cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure
that the battery connection is good.
If the encoder memory is lost for an axis on a head.
The battery in the head maintains the encoder memory for the axes on the head. If the
encoder cable is disconnected from a motor or the battery is disconnected when there is no
power being supplied to the encoder from the machine, the encoder memory is lost. If the
encoder memory is lost for some reason, an encoder backup error occurs. Perform the
following steps if this occurs for an axis on a head. Only perform the following steps if a Fuji
representative has trained you on how to perform them. If you have not been trained on
how to perform the following steps, contact your Fuji representative.
1. Check the battery for the head. If it is already connected and the encoder cables for the
axes were not disconnected, replace the battery. If unsure whether the battery is good
or not, replace the battery with a new one.
2. Move all of the axes on the head gently by hand to their correct positions for each axis
to reset the origin positioning.
3. Perform a MT Reset for all of the axes on the head.
4. Set nozzle jigs in the nozzle station and perform autocalibration. Refer to "4.10.4 Setting
nozzle jigs" for details on setting nozzle jigs in the module. Once autocalibration has
been completed, the machine can be used for production. If the error has not been
cleared, check the encoder cable connection and ensure that the battery connection is
good.

12.3.9 If there is computer system trouble

The following are instructions for correcting trouble items that may occur within the
computer system (Fujitrax, Fuji Flexa, Fuji Accessory Software) for the AIMEX.
When the error "????2108" and/or "8D32????" occurs on the

machine.
Error conditions:
• This error may occur after the power for the machines or computers have been
turned off for a long period of time (for example, after a holiday) and the power
is turned back on.
Were the computers This occurs when communication cannot be performed because
and machines the order in which items are turned on is incorrect.
turned on in the Turn on the power to the items in the following order.
correct order? The time for starting each item is different due to the differences
in computers and machines. Due to this, boot one item and then
log on and wait until that item is fully booted before proceeding
to the next item.
1. Boot any computers with the Fujitrax Verifier database and

then any computers for the Profiler databases (if Profiler is being
used).
2. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa User Server, Job
Server, and Line Server (in this order if on separate computers).
3. Boot any computers with the Fuji Central Server for the
AIMEX machine.
(Ensure that the Fuji Central Server service has started.)
4. Boot any computers with the Fuji Flexa Machine

Communicate Service for AIMEX machines (if they are separate
from the Fuji Flexa User Server).
5. Turn on the AIMEX machines. Production can be started

once the job has been downloaded.
Was the power for If several AIMEX lines exist, and the power for all of the lines is
multiple AIMEX turned on simultaneously, then job downloading for all of the
lines turned on at machines is also conducted simultaneously. When this
once? happens, the Fuji Flexa server is requested to send several jobs
to several machines at once, and according to the capability of
the computer, a time up error may occur during the job download
process.
Turn on one line at a time and wait until the machine in that line
has finished downloading the job before turning on the next line.
Is the network This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are not
operating correctly? functioning correctly and/or are disconnected. Restart the
power for the network hub or replace it and/or the network
cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific base,
replace the network cable that is connected to that base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different bases,
replace the network hub that is being used for those bases.

When the error "8D32????" occurs on the machine and/or the Fuji
Central Server (Fuji Profiler Central Server) stops because of an error.
Error conditions:
• Operation cannot be started even if the order in which the computers are started
is correct or the central server is rebooted.
Is the correct data It is possible that incorrect data is included in the data that is
saved in the central saved in the Fuji Central Server.
server? Perform the follow procedure to clear the central server data.
1. Stop the Fuji Central Server service (also stop the Fuji
Profiler Central Server service if it is started).
2. Change the name of the "Resume" folder in the Fujitrax

install location.
<drive>:\Program Files\FUJI\Trx\Verifiej\KitObj\Bin
3. Start the Fuji Central Server service (also the Fuji Profiler
Central Server if it is being used)
4. Transmit the job to the machine. If no error occurs, begin

production.
If the error is not corrected, turn the AIMEX off and then on.
Is the network This error occurs when a network hub or network cables are
operating correctly? not functioning correctly and/or are disconnected.
Restart the power for the network hub or replace it and/or the
network cables.
When the error occurs only for the modules on a specific
base, replace the network cable that is connected to that
base.
When the error occurs for modules on several different bases,
replace the network hub that is being used for those bases.
When the error "8D32702A" occurs for the first module of a machine
that is in production.
Error condition:
• An error occurs at the first module in a line that is using Fujitrax Profiler (the
panel ID is read using an external panel ID reader and a FLP).
Is the panel unload This can be caused by the panel unload sensor (out side)
sensor on the conveyor for the conveyor before the machine (the conveyor installed
with the panel ID reading with the panel ID reading unit) remaining either ON or OFF.
unit remaining on or off?
Adjust the panel unload sensor (out side) on the conveyor
unit so that it is functioning properly.

Fujitrax Verifier has been started, but even if the feeders are set
correctly, a module does not verify that feeders are set correctly, or the
error "8D32702A" occurs when panel conveyance is started.
Error condition:
• This error occurs when using reverse panel flow or when the direction of panel
conveyance has been changed.
Is the setting correct in This error occurs when the settings in the Kit line
the Kit line configuration are incorrect.
configuration? When specifying line settings at Kit Line Configuration, it is
necessary to set the bases and robots in the order of the
panel flow direction.
For twin robots, set the order from side 1 to side 2.

(Example) 4 3 2 1 Side 2
Panel flow direction
Side 1
Base 2 Base 1 30SYS-0357E
*Bases are specified using IP addresses. However, to make

the example here easier to understand, the bases are
specified using the names "Base 1" and "Base 2".
If the machine cannot download a job (the error "????2108" occurs).
Has the job been If the job has been renamed, moved, or deleted, the machine
renamed, moved, or will not be able to locate the job and an error occurs.
deleted? Undo any changes that have been done to the previous job
(such as a new name) or delete the current job using
Accessory Software and then transmit the new job to the
machine using Fuji Flexa.
Refer to the Accessory Software online manual for details on

deleting jobs from the machine.
Are the Fuji Flexa When the Fuji Flexa (user server, job server, machine
server computers (user communication server) computer is turned off, is in sleep
server, job server, mode, or is not connected with the network, the AIMEX
machine cannot receive jobs and this error will occur when attempting
communication server) to download jobs.
turned on and Turn on the AIMEX after ensuring that the Fuji Flexa server
connected to the (user server, job server, machine communication server)
network? computers are turned on and connected to the network.
Also, change the setting of the computers with Fuji Flexa
servers so that they will not enter sleep mode.
Change the settings for notebook computers so that the
computer will not enter sleep mode even when the cover is
closed.

Production information for a line cannot be compiled or displayed in

Line Reporter or Line Monitor Client.
Error conditions:
• Production information for a line report cannot be compiled only for a specific
line.
• In Line Monitor Client, the background of the machine name or the line name is
black.
• If the machine operation history or other functions are opened in Line Monitor
Client, no data is displayed in the graphs.
Was a line change Production information is not totaled correctly when line
performed successfully settings from Fuji Flexa or line change notices are not
or are the line settings performed correctly.
correct? The same error may occur when there are different
machines with the same IP address in the line settings.
Is there another
machine with the same Follow the procedure below to report the changes.
IP address in the line
settings? 1. Push CYCLE STOP to stop production for the AIMEX line
for which production data is not correctly totaled.
2. In Fuji Flexa, change the status of the line to a virtual line

and send a line change notice.
3. Next, change the status of the line to a real line and send
a line change notice.
Was a current line One example of trouble that occurs is when a new line is
copied and then pasted added to the factory and line configuration data in Fuji Flexa
in Fuji Flexa Line is created. If the configuration of a line that closely
Editor? resembles the line that is being created is copied and then
pasted, then there is a temporary situation where two lines
with the same configuration (IP address) exist. This may
cause errors in the collection of production data.
Use the steps listed below when creating a new line by
copying an existing line.
1. Create the new line as a virtual line.
2. Copy the machine configurations that resemble the new

line being created and paste them into the virtual line that
was created in step 1.
3. After changing the machine configuration (machine IP

address, machine communication service IP address) for
the new line, change the line to a real line and send a line
change notice from Fuji Flexa.

There is a discrepancy in the production information for the number of

parts used and for the number of parts rejected.
Error condition:
• There is a significant discrepancy in the totaled production information for a

specific line only.
Is production being Production information is not totaled correctly when

performed using production is performed using different job names in the
different job names? same AIMEX line.
A particular characteristic of this error is that no information is
displayed regarding parts or feeders, but information
regarding machine errors is displayed.
This error occurs when a job is transmitted to the background
and job changeover is performed at an individual module.
Make sure that the entire line is using the same job for
production.
A line does not display in Floor Monitor in Accessory Software or the

module configuration is not correct.
Error condition:
• After upgrading the machine or setting up the line, the line is not displayed in
Floor Monitor.
Is the data being used The settings in Fuji Realtime Workingrate Buffer Service
by the Realtime (hereafter referred to as RWB) are not correct, or RWB is not
Workingrate Buffer operating properly.
service correct?
Follow the procedure below to correct this data.
1. Ensure that the computer names or IP addresses are

correctly set in the machine communicate server in Fuji Flexa
for the line (bases) that does not display in Floor Monitor.
The computer with the Machine Communicate Server is the
computer running the FNC Machine Communication Service.
2. Send a line change notice from Fuji Flexa.
3. Open the [Service] window (from the Windows control

panel) on the computer with the machine communicate
server for the AIMEX machine and restart the Realtime
Workingrate Buffer service.
4. Access the Accessory Software website and in the upper

right section of the Floor Monitor page, click [Service List]
and the click [Check] in the [Checking and restarting RWB
services] section. Then click [Restart] for the RWB service
for the line with the problem. After RWB has restarted
(approximately 10 seconds), check to see if the line is
displayed in Floor Monitor.

12.4 Troubleshooting Common Fuji Flexa and

Fujitrax Related Issues
12.4.1 Fuji Flexa related errors
After transmitting jobs, the machine requires many items to be
changed such as heads.
This can indicate a configuration problem in the job.
Open the job and ensure that the module configuration matches that of the actual machine
(for example, module types, head types, nozzle station types). If an error is found, correct
the error and optimize the job for the AIMEX again.
When I attempt to transmit a job, the AIMEX machine has a red X over
the icon in the [Transmit Job] dialog box, but I know the job has the
correct AIMEX machine.
The most likely cause for this problem is that the job being transmitted is in the local job
directory.
Copy the job into the global job directory and attempt to transmit the same job from the
global directory. There should be no red X in the [Transmit Job] dialog box. Only jobs in
the global directory can be transmitted to AIMEX machines.
12.4.2 Fujitrax related errors

The AIMEX machine is registered and setup correctly in the line
configuration file for Fujitrax and the system has been restarted, but
the AIMEX still does not use Fujitrax.
The Fujitrax configuration setting for the AIMEX must be turned on and then the machine
rebooted before the AIMEX will access the Fujitrax system. Unlike previous machines, this
setting is not made on the machine. To change this setting, Accessory Software must be
used. Refer to the procedures "Making Machine Configuration Settings" in the Fuji
Accessory Software chapter for how to change the Fujitrax setting.
I made IDs for the parts and feeders, but when I set the parts on the
machine, it will never accept the parts even though they and the
feeders are correct.
The most likely cause for this issue is that the Quickverify required mode is set to "ON" at
the computer with the Verifier Central Server for the AIMEX.
When this setting is on, even if the parts are correct and IDs are created, the parts will not
be accepted when set on the machine until a quickverify is performed on those parts.
Perform a quickverify for the parts and if the machine then accepts the feeders, then that
was the issue. Turn this setting off if this mode is not desired.

After logging on to the Kit Handy, I cannot select the AIMEX machine
in the device check mode. Nor do I see any parts out warnings or
machine errors for the AIMEX.
The most likely cause for not being able to access the AIMEX device check screen is that
the User ID used to log on is not registered for the AIMEX in the Kit Handy Settings.
Start Kit Manager and have an administrator level user log on. In the line display on the left
side of the window, right-click the AIMEX machine and select [Kit Handy Settings] from the
shortcut menu that displays. The dialog box for the [Kit Handy Setting] displays with a list
of users that are responsible for that AIMEX machine. Add the user ID previously used to
this list.
This setting affects which machines display in the Parts out list and Machine Errors list at
Kit Handy as well as the machines that a device check can be performed on. In addition,
this setting also determines which machines display under the [Operator] branch in Kit
Manager for the user logged on.
12.5 Major Machine Issues

Many units on the AIMEX can be replaced easily without any special measurements or skill
required, refer to the AIMEX Mechanical Reference for procedures on replacing units. If a
unit quits working or there is an intermediate problem, replace the unit and check the
condition of the new unit. If the new unit is works fine, send the old unit to be serviced with
a detailed description of the problem.
It is important to note that while units are easy to replace, items in units should not be
changed or adjusted except by qualified Fuji representatives. This point ensures that all
units are the same and this is one of the reasons for easy replacement and the lack of
special measurements. Some examples of "units" are the parts camera/lighting unit, head,
module CPU, and the mark camera/lighting unit.
Note: If an item is not in the AIMEX Mechanical Reference and the procedures for replacing that
are unknown, then do not attempt to replace the item. Contact your Fuji representative for
guidance about the item.
If a major problem is encountered (such as, numerous OS errors) and it cannot be resolved,
acquire the trace data from all of the related items and send this data to your Fuji
representative along with a detailed explanation of the conditions in which the problem
occurs, any steps taken to resolve the problem, and any error codes displayed. If all of this
data is sent to your Fuji representative, the troubleshooting process is greatly aided and
steps already taken mostly likely do not need to be repeated, thus saving time.

12.6 Acquiring Trace Data

Use the following procedures to acquire trace data from the machine when errors and
software issues occur.
There are four methods for generating trace data.
a. Acquiring from Accessory Software.
b. After an OS error occurs, trace data is automatically generated.
c. Forcing trace data to be generated when turning on the machine.
d. Acquiring temporarily saved generated trace data on the machine.
12.6.1 Acquiring trace data using Accessory Software

Trace data can be acquired using Accessory Software in the following situations:
- An error message is displayed on the operation panel and production is stopped by

pushing CYCLE STOP or EMERGENCY STOP
- An incorrect operation is discovered and production is stopped by pushing CYCLE STOP

or EMERGENCY STOP
1. Do not perform any operations on the machine until trace data acquisition is completed.
2. Acquire the trace data using Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] -
[Acquire Trace] from the machine accessories section when the machine is selected.
Note: For details on how to acquire trace data, refer to section "4. Acquiring machine trace data"
If settings to acquire trace data automatically have been specified in Accessory Software,
trace data is automatically acquired when the machine stops due to errors.
Note: Refer to "8.9 Acquiring Machine Trace Data Automatically" for details.
12.6.2 Automatic trace data generation after an OS error

Use the procedure written below to acquire trace data that is automatically generated in the
following situations:
- An OS error occurs
- An application error occurs (the penguin pictogram is displayed).
The procedures below must be followed. If the main power switch for the machine is not
turned on and then off, trace data cannot be acquired using Accessory Software due to a
communication error.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using
Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine
accessories section when the module is selected.

12.6.3 Forced generation of trace data when turning on the machine

Forced trace data acquisition can be used when trace data cannot be acquired in
Accessory Software because the machine hangs up and no operations or communication
with Accessory Software is possible.
Follow the procedure below to acquire trace data.
1. Turn off the main power switch.
2. Turn on the main power switch.
3. When the module turns on, and after the panel STANDBY lamp is lit and writing is just
starting to be displayed in the module operation panel, immediately push and hold the
OK and CANCEL buttons.
4. When [OS Error...] is displayed, release the OK and CANCEL buttons.
5. When the module has started and entered sleep mode, acquire the trace data using
Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition] - [Acquire Trace] from the machine
accessories section when the module is selected.
12.6.4 Temporarily saving trace data on the machine

By using commands on the module, it is possible to generate trace data. This allows trace
data to be saved temporarily in the machine if an error occurs during production.
Note: Refer to "6.7 Temporarily Saving Trace Data on the Machine" for details.
Afterwards, acquire the trace data using Accessory Software by selecting [Data Acquisition]
- [Acquire Trace] from the machine accessories section when the machine is selected.

MEMO:

Fuji Technical Information Website
The Fuji Technical Information website aims at providing up-to-date infor-

mation to our customers in the most efficient manner. This site provides
the latest technical information and a range of services, from manuals,
upgrade reports, sample part data, to custom part support. Fuji hopes
that the vast wealth of information on this site will be used in addition to
the services provided by your Fuji representative.
Membership is required in order to access the Fuji Technical Information

website. Please contact your Fuji representative for membership details.
Any comments or opinions regarding this document can be sent to the

email address below.
Email address: [email protected]
AIMEX System Reference
Management No. Date Notes
SYS-AIMEX-1.0E October 8, 2010 -

SYS-AIMEX-2.0E August 3, 2011 AIMEX V1.80
SYS-AIMEX-2.1E October 31, 2011 AIMEX V1.90
SYS-AIMEX-3.0E December 9, 2011 AIMEX V2.05
SYS-AIMEX-3.1E April 6, 2012 AIMEX V2.10
SYS-AIMEX-3.2E May 31, 2012 AIMEX V2.20
SYS-AIMEX-3.4E March 25, 2013 AIMEX V2.50
SYS-AIMEX-3.5E September 11, 2013 AIMEX V2.70
SYS-AIMEX-4.0E November 1, 2013 AIMEX V2.80
SYS-AIMEX-5.0E January 31, 2014 AIMEX V2.90
SYS-AIMEX-6.0E March 31, 2014 AIMEX V3.00
SYS-AIMEX-8.0E April 30, 2015 AIMEX V3.40
SYS-AIMEX-9.0E August 31, 2015 AIMEX V4.10
FUJI MACHINE MFG. Co., Ltd.

19 Chausuyama, Yamamachi, Chiryu,
Aichi Prefecture, 472-8686 Japan
2015 FUJI MACHINE MFG. CO., LTD. All Rights Reserved.

Printed in Japan
This manual is printed on recycled paper.

LSR AIMEX

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LSR AIMEX

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LSR AIMEX

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fuji Flexible Placement Platform

FUJI MACHINE MFG. CO., LTD.

Warranty and Liability

AIMEX System Reference i

3.1.3 Changing a module to sleep mode ...................... 27

ii AIMEX System Reference

4.6.2 Setting trays ..........................................................59

AIMEX System Reference iii

4.11.3 Changing between V-Advance and standard

iv AIMEX System Reference

5.7 Clearing Errors ............................................. 154

AIMEX System Reference v

6.8.1 Using the automatic nozzle cleaning function .... 175

vi AIMEX System Reference

6.16 Reducing Auto Calibration Time When

AIMEX System Reference vii

7.7.4 Maximizing the conveyor width .......................... 230

viii AIMEX System Reference

8.9 Acquiring Machine Trace Data

AIMEX System Reference ix

9.4.2 Acquiring images ................................................ 282

x AIMEX System Reference

10.6 TcpIpSetting ............................................... 303

AIMEX System Reference xi

12.3.5 Panel conveyance errors ................................. 348

xii AIMEX System Reference

• AIMEX Setup Manual

• AIMEX System Reference

• AIMEX Mechanical Reference

• AIMEX series Programming Manual

AIMEX Setup Manual

AIMEX System Reference

AIMEX Mechanical Reference

AIMEX series Programming Manual

AIMEX System Reference xiii

xiv AIMEX System Reference

1.1 About Symbols

1.1.1 Degree of hazards

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to severe

Failure to observe this hazard warning may lead to

1.1.2 Examples of the symbols

A circle with an exclamation mark is used to draw your attention to a

AIMEX System Reference 1

1.2 Safety Rules for All Machine Types

• Body parts or clothing may get caught in the machine, resulting

• Body parts may get caught in the machine, resulting in injury.

Do not operate the machine with the safety covers or doors

• When safety covers or doors are removed, body parts or

Always verify the position of the EMERGENCY STOP

• Always be aware of the positions of the EMERGENCY STOP

Check the safety functions before starting operation.

• Before starting the machine, check the operation of the

Do not remove safety switches or disable safety functions.

• Do not short or remove the machine’s safety switches or disable

2 AIMEX System Reference

• Verify that nobody is in or near the machine before operating

Do not go near a machine that has stopped moving.

• There are times during automatic operation when the machine

Do not place hands near the main conveyor.